manual de instalación y configuración fcd-e1l.pdf

226
FCD-E1L Managed E1 or Fractional E1 Access Unit Version 2.0 INSTALLATION AND OPERATION MANUAL The Access Company

Upload: sopenco

Post on 21-Oct-2015

85 views

Category:

Documents


6 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

FCD-E1LManaged E1 or Fractional E1 Access Unit

Version 2.0

INSTA

LLATIO

N A

ND

O

PER

ATIO

N M

AN

UA

L

The Access Company

Page 2: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf
Page 3: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

FCD-E1L Managed E1 or Fractional E1 Access Unit

Version 2.0

Installation and Operation Manual

Notice

This manual contains information that is proprietary to RAD Data Communications Ltd. ("RAD"). No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without prior written approval by RAD Data Communications.

Right, title and interest, all information, copyrights, patents, know-how, trade secrets and other intellectual property or other proprietary rights relating to this manual and to the FCD-E1L and any software components contained therein are proprietary products of RAD protected under international copyright law and shall be and remain solely with RAD.

FCD-E1L is a registered trademark of RAD. No right, license, or interest to such trademark is granted hereunder, and you agree that no such right, license, or interest shall be asserted by you with respect to such trademark.

You shall not copy, reverse compile or reverse assemble all or any portion of the Manual or the FCD-E1L. You are prohibited from, and shall not, directly or indirectly, develop, market, distribute, license, or sell any product that supports substantially similar functionality as the FCD-E1L, based on or derived in any way from the FCD-E1L. Your undertaking in this paragraph shall survive the termination of this Agreement.

This Agreement is effective upon your opening of the FCD-E1L package and shall continue until terminated. RAD may terminate this Agreement upon the breach by you of any term hereof. Upon such termination by RAD, you agree to return to RAD the FCD-E1L and all copies and portions thereof.

For further information contact RAD at the address below or contact your local distributor.

International Headquarters RAD Data Communications Ltd.

24 Raoul Wallenberg Street Tel Aviv 69719, Israel Tel: 972-3-6458181 Fax: 972-3-6498250, 6474436 E-mail: [email protected]

North America Headquarters RAD Data Communications Inc.

900 Corporate Drive Mahwah, NJ 07430, USA Tel: (201) 5291100, Toll free: 1-800-4447234 Fax: (201) 5295777 E-mail: [email protected]

© 1991–2007 RAD Data Communications Ltd. Publication No. 165-200-11/07

Page 4: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Limited Warranty

RAD warrants to DISTRIBUTOR that the hardware in the FCD-E1L to be delivered hereunder shall be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of twelve (12) months following the date of shipment to DISTRIBUTOR.

If, during the warranty period, any component part of the equipment becomes defective by reason of material or workmanship, and DISTRIBUTOR immediately notifies RAD of such defect, RAD shall have the option to choose the appropriate corrective action: a) supply a replacement part, or b) request return of equipment to its plant for repair, or c) perform necessary repair at the equipment's location. In the event that RAD requests the return of equipment, each party shall pay one-way shipping costs.

RAD shall be released from all obligations under its warranty in the event that the equipment has been subjected to misuse, neglect, accident or improper installation, or if repairs or modifications were made by persons other than RAD's own authorized service personnel, unless such repairs by others were made with the written consent of RAD.

The above warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied. There are no warranties which extend beyond the face hereof, including, but not limited to, warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, and in no event shall RAD be liable for consequential damages.

RAD shall not be liable to any person for any special or indirect damages, including, but not limited to, lost profits from any cause whatsoever arising from or in any way connected with the manufacture, sale, handling, repair, maintenance or use of the FCD-E1L, and in no event shall RAD's liability exceed the purchase price of the FCD-E1L.

DISTRIBUTOR shall be responsible to its customers for any and all warranties which it makes relating to FCD-E1L and for ensuring that replacements and other adjustments required in connection with the said warranties are satisfactory.

Software components in the FCD-E1L are provided "as is" and without warranty of any kind. RAD disclaims all warranties including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. RAD shall not be liable for any loss of use, interruption of business or indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages of any kind. In spite of the above RAD shall do its best to provide error-free software products and shall offer free Software updates during the warranty period under this Agreement.

RAD's cumulative liability to you or any other party for any loss or damages resulting from any claims, demands, or actions arising out of or relating to this Agreement and the FCD-E1L shall not exceed the sum paid to RAD for the purchase of the FCD-E1L. In no event shall RAD be liable for any indirect, incidental, consequential, special, or exemplary damages or lost profits, even if RAD has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

This Agreement shall be construed and governed in accordance with the laws of the State of Israel.

Product Disposal

To facilitate the reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of waste equipment in protecting the environment, the owner of this RAD product is required to refrain from disposing of this product as unsorted municipal waste at the end of its life cycle. Upon termination of the unit’s use, customers should provide for its collection for reuse, recycling or other form of environmentally conscientious disposal.

Page 5: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

General Safety Instructions

The following instructions serve as a general guide for the safe installation and operation of telecommunications products. Additional instructions, if applicable, are included inside the manual.

Safety Symbols

This symbol may appear on the equipment or in the text. It indicates potential safety hazards regarding product operation or maintenance to operator or service personnel.

Danger of electric shock! Avoid any contact with the marked surface while the product is energized or connected to outdoor telecommunication lines.

Protective ground: the marked lug or terminal should be connected to the building protective ground bus.

Some products may be equipped with a laser diode. In such cases, a label with the laser class and other warnings as applicable will be attached near the optical transmitter. The laser warning symbol may be also attached.

Please observe the following precautions:

• Before turning on the equipment, make sure that the fiber optic cable is intact and is connected to the transmitter.

• Do not attempt to adjust the laser drive current.

• Do not use broken or unterminated fiber-optic cables/connectors or look straight at the laser beam.

• The use of optical devices with the equipment will increase eye hazard.

• Use of controls, adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified herein, may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

ATTENTION: The laser beam may be invisible!

In some cases, the users may insert their own SFP laser transceivers into the product. Users are alerted that RAD cannot be held responsible for any damage that may result if non-compliant transceivers are used. In particular, users are warned to use only agency approved products that comply with the local laser safety regulations for Class 1 laser products.

Always observe standard safety precautions during installation, operation and maintenance of this product. Only qualified and authorized service personnel should carry out adjustment, maintenance or repairs to this product. No installation, adjustment, maintenance or repairs should be performed by either the operator or the user.

Warning

Warning

Page 6: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Handling Energized Products

General Safety Practices

Do not touch or tamper with the power supply when the power cord is connected. Line voltages may be present inside certain products even when the power switch (if installed) is in the OFF position or a fuse is blown. For DC-powered products, although the voltages levels are usually not hazardous, energy hazards may still exist.

Before working on equipment connected to power lines or telecommunication lines, remove jewelry or any other metallic object that may come into contact with energized parts.

Unless otherwise specified, all products are intended to be grounded during normal use. Grounding is provided by connecting the mains plug to a wall socket with a protective ground terminal. If a ground lug is provided on the product, it should be connected to the protective ground at all times, by a wire with a diameter of 18 AWG or wider. Rack-mounted equipment should be mounted only in grounded racks and cabinets.

Always make the ground connection first and disconnect it last. Do not connect telecommunication cables to ungrounded equipment. Make sure that all other cables are disconnected before disconnecting the ground.

Connecting AC Mains

Make sure that the electrical installation complies with local codes.

Always connect the AC plug to a wall socket with a protective ground.

The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power to the product is 16A. The circuit breaker in the building installation should have high breaking capacity and must operate at short-circuit current exceeding 35A.

Always connect the power cord first to the equipment and then to the wall socket. If a power switch is provided in the equipment, set it to the OFF position. If the power cord cannot be readily disconnected in case of emergency, make sure that a readily accessible circuit breaker or emergency switch is installed in the building installation.

In cases when the power distribution system is IT type, the switch must disconnect both poles simultaneously.

Connecting DC Power

Unless otherwise specified in the manual, the DC input to the equipment is floating in reference to the ground. Any single pole can be externally grounded.

Due to the high current capability of DC power systems, care should be taken when connecting the DC supply to avoid short-circuits and fire hazards.

DC units should be installed in a restricted access area, i.e. an area where access is authorized only to qualified service and maintenance personnel.

Make sure that the DC power supply is electrically isolated from any AC source and that the installation complies with the local codes.

The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power to the product is 16A. The circuit breaker in the building installation should have high breaking capacity and must operate at short-circuit current exceeding 35A.

Page 7: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Before connecting the DC supply wires, ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit. Locate the circuit breaker of the panel board that services the equipment and switch it to the OFF position. When connecting the DC supply wires, first connect the ground wire to the corresponding terminal, then the positive pole and last the negative pole. Switch the circuit breaker back to the ON position.

A readily accessible disconnect device that is suitably rated and approved should be incorporated in the building installation.

If the DC power supply is floating, the switch must disconnect both poles simultaneously.

Connecting Data and Telecommunications Cables

Data and telecommunication interfaces are classified according to their safety status.

The following table lists the status of several standard interfaces. If the status of a given port differs from the standard one, a notice will be given in the manual.

Ports Safety Status

V.11, V.28, V.35, V.36, RS-530, X.21, 10 BaseT, 100 BaseT, Unbalanced E1, E2, E3, STM, DS-2, DS-3, S-Interface ISDN, Analog voice E&M

SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage:

Ports which do not present a safety hazard. Usually up to 30 VAC or 60 VDC.

xDSL (without feeding voltage), Balanced E1, T1, Sub E1/T1

TNV-1 Telecommunication Network Voltage-1:

Ports whose normal operating voltage is within the limits of SELV, on which overvoltages from telecommunications networks are possible.

FXS (Foreign Exchange Subscriber) TNV-2 Telecommunication Network Voltage-2:

Ports whose normal operating voltage exceeds the limits of SELV (usually up to 120 VDC or telephone ringing voltages), on which overvoltages from telecommunication networks are not possible. These ports are not permitted to be directly connected to external telephone and data lines.

FXO (Foreign Exchange Office), xDSL (with feeding voltage), U-Interface ISDN

TNV-3 Telecommunication Network Voltage-3:

Ports whose normal operating voltage exceeds the limits of SELV (usually up to 120 VDC or telephone ringing voltages), on which overvoltages from telecommunication networks are possible.

Always connect a given port to a port of the same safety status. If in doubt, seek the assistance of a qualified safety engineer.

Always make sure that the equipment is grounded before connecting telecommunication cables. Do not disconnect the ground connection before disconnecting all telecommunications cables.

Some SELV and non-SELV circuits use the same connectors. Use caution when connecting cables. Extra caution should be exercised during thunderstorms.

When using shielded or coaxial cables, verify that there is a good ground connection at both ends. The grounding and bonding of the ground connections should comply with the local codes.

The telecommunication wiring in the building may be damaged or present a fire hazard in case of contact between exposed external wires and the AC power lines. In order to reduce the risk,

Page 8: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

there are restrictions on the diameter of wires in the telecom cables, between the equipment and the mating connectors.

To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cords.

Pour réduire les risques s’incendie, utiliser seulement des conducteurs de télécommunications 26 AWG ou de section supérieure.

Some ports are suitable for connection to intra-building or non-exposed wiring or cabling only. In such cases, a notice will be given in the installation instructions.

Do not attempt to tamper with any carrier-provided equipment or connection hardware.

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

The equipment is designed and approved to comply with the electromagnetic regulations of major regulatory bodies. The following instructions may enhance the performance of the equipment and will provide better protection against excessive emission and better immunity against disturbances.

A good ground connection is essential. When installing the equipment in a rack, make sure to remove all traces of paint from the mounting points. Use suitable lock-washers and torque. If an external grounding lug is provided, connect it to the ground bus using braided wire as short as possible.

The equipment is designed to comply with EMC requirements when connecting it with unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cables. However, the use of shielded wires is always recommended, especially for high-rate data. In some cases, when unshielded wires are used, ferrite cores should be installed on certain cables. In such cases, special instructions are provided in the manual.

Disconnect all wires which are not in permanent use, such as cables used for one-time configuration.

The compliance of the equipment with the regulations for conducted emission on the data lines is dependent on the cable quality. The emission is tested for UTP with 80 dB longitudinal conversion loss (LCL).

Unless otherwise specified or described in the manual, TNV-1 and TNV-3 ports provide secondary protection against surges on the data lines. Primary protectors should be provided in the building installation.

The equipment is designed to provide adequate protection against electro-static discharge (ESD). However, it is good working practice to use caution when connecting cables terminated with plastic connectors (without a grounded metal hood, such as flat cables) to sensitive data lines. Before connecting such cables, discharge yourself by touching ground or wear an ESD preventive wrist strap.

Caution

Attention

Page 9: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

FCC-15 User Information

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of the Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the Installation and Operation manual, may cause harmful interference to the radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Canadian Emission Requirements

This Class A digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulation.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.

Warning per EN 55022 (CISPR-22)

This is a class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user will be required to take adequate measures.

Cet appareil est un appareil de Classe A. Dans un environnement résidentiel, cet appareil peut provoquer des brouillages radioélectriques. Dans ces cas, il peut être demandé à l’utilisateur de prendre les mesures appropriées.

Das vorliegende Gerät fällt unter die Funkstörgrenzwertklasse A. In Wohngebieten können beim Betrieb dieses Gerätes Rundfunkströrungen auftreten, für deren Behebung der Benutzer verantwortlich ist.

Warning

Avertissement

Achtung

Page 10: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Fra

nça

is

Mise au rebut du produit

Afin de faciliter la réutilisation, le recyclage ainsi que d'autres formes de récupération d'équipement mis au rebut dans le cadre de la protection de l'environnement, il est demandé au propriétaire de ce produit RAD de ne pas mettre ce dernier au rebut en tant que déchet municipal non trié, une fois que le produit est arrivé en fin de cycle de vie. Le client devrait proposer des solutions de réutilisation, de recyclage ou toute autre forme de mise au rebut de cette unité dans un esprit de protection de l'environnement, lorsqu'il aura fini de l'utiliser.

Instructions générales de sécurité

Les instructions suivantes servent de guide général d'installation et d'opération sécurisées des produits de télécommunications. Des instructions supplémentaires sont éventuellement indiquées dans le manuel.

Symboles de sécurité

Ce symbole peut apparaitre sur l'équipement ou dans le texte. Il indique des risques potentiels de sécurité pour l'opérateur ou le personnel de service, quant à l'opération du produit ou à sa maintenance.

Danger de choc électrique ! Evitez tout contact avec la surface marquée tant que le produit est sous tension ou connecté à des lignes externes de télécommunications.

Mise à la terre de protection : la cosse ou la borne marquée devrait être connectée à la prise de terre de protection du bâtiment.

Avertissement

Page 11: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Fra

nça

is

Certains produits peuvent être équipés d'une diode laser. Dans de tels cas, une étiquette indiquant la classe laser ainsi que d'autres avertissements, le cas échéant, sera jointe près du transmetteur optique. Le symbole d'avertissement laser peut aussi être joint.

Veuillez observer les précautions suivantes :

• Avant la mise en marche de l'équipement, assurez-vous que le câble de fibre optique est intact et qu'il est connecté au transmetteur.

• Ne tentez pas d'ajuster le courant de la commande laser.

• N'utilisez pas des câbles ou connecteurs de fibre optique cassés ou sans terminaison et n'observez pas directement un rayon laser.

• L'usage de périphériques optiques avec l'équipement augmentera le risque pour les yeux.

• L'usage de contrôles, ajustages ou procédures autres que celles spécifiées ici pourrait résulter en une dangereuse exposition aux radiations.

ATTENTION : Le rayon laser peut être invisible !

Les utilisateurs pourront, dans certains cas, insérer leurs propres émetteurs-récepteurs Laser SFP dans le produit. Les utilisateurs sont avertis que RAD ne pourra pas être tenue responsable de tout dommage pouvant résulter de l'utilisation d'émetteurs-récepteurs non conformes. Plus particulièrement, les utilisateurs sont avertis de n'utiliser que des produits approuvés par l'agence et conformes à la réglementation locale de sécurité laser pour les produits laser de classe 1.

Respectez toujours les précautions standards de sécurité durant l'installation, l'opération et la maintenance de ce produit. Seul le personnel de service qualifié et autorisé devrait effectuer l'ajustage, la maintenance ou les réparations de ce produit. Aucune opération d'installation, d'ajustage, de maintenance ou de réparation ne devrait être effectuée par l'opérateur ou l'utilisateur.

Manipuler des produits sous tension

Règles générales de sécurité

Ne pas toucher ou altérer l'alimentation en courant lorsque le câble d'alimentation est branché. Des tensions de lignes peuvent être présentes dans certains produits, même lorsque le commutateur (s'il est installé) est en position OFF ou si le fusible est rompu. Pour les produits alimentés par CC, les niveaux de tension ne sont généralement pas dangereux mais des risques de courant peuvent toujours exister.

Avant de travailler sur un équipement connecté aux lignes de tension ou de télécommunications, retirez vos bijoux ou tout autre objet métallique pouvant venir en contact avec les pièces sous tension.

Sauf s'il en est autrement indiqué, tous les produits sont destinés à être mis à la terre durant l'usage normal. La mise à la terre est fournie par la connexion de la fiche principale à une prise murale équipée d'une borne protectrice de mise à la terre. Si une cosse de mise à la terre est fournie avec le produit, elle devrait être connectée à tout moment à une mise à la terre de protection par un conducteur de diamètre 18 AWG ou plus. L'équipement monté en châssis ne devrait être monté que sur des châssis et dans des armoires mises à la terre.

Branchez toujours la mise à la terre en premier et débranchez-la en dernier. Ne branchez pas des câbles de télécommunications à un équipement qui n'est pas mis à la terre. Assurez-vous que tous les autres câbles sont débranchés avant de déconnecter la mise à la terre.

Avertissement

Page 12: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Fra

nça

is

Connexion au courant du secteur

Assurez-vous que l'installation électrique est conforme à la réglementation locale.

Branchez toujours la fiche de secteur à une prise murale équipée d'une borne protectrice de mise à la terre.

La capacité maximale permissible en courant du circuit de distribution de la connexion alimentant le produit est de 16A. Le coupe-circuit dans l'installation du bâtiment devrait avoir une capacité élevée de rupture et devrait fonctionner sur courant de court-circuit dépassant 35A.

Branchez toujours le câble d'alimentation en premier à l'équipement puis à la prise murale. Si un commutateur est fourni avec l'équipement, fixez-le en position OFF. Si le câble d'alimentation ne peut pas être facilement débranché en cas d'urgence, assurez-vous qu'un coupe-circuit ou un disjoncteur d'urgence facilement accessible est installé dans l'installation du bâtiment.

Le disjoncteur devrait déconnecter simultanément les deux pôles si le système de distribution de courant est de type IT.

Connexion d'alimentation CC

Sauf s'il en est autrement spécifié dans le manuel, l'entrée CC de l'équipement est flottante par rapport à la mise à la terre. Tout pôle doit être mis à la terre en externe.

A cause de la capacité de courant des systèmes à alimentation CC, des précautions devraient être prises lors de la connexion de l'alimentation CC pour éviter des courts-circuits et des risques d'incendie.

Les unités CC devraient être installées dans une zone à accès restreint, une zone où l'accès n'est autorisé qu'au personnel qualifié de service et de maintenance.

Assurez-vous que l'alimentation CC est isolée de toute source de courant CA (secteur) et que l'installation est conforme à la réglementation locale.

La capacité maximale permissible en courant du circuit de distribution de la connexion alimentant le produit est de 16A. Le coupe-circuit dans l'installation du bâtiment devrait avoir une capacité élevée de rupture et devrait fonctionner sur courant de court-circuit dépassant 35A.

Avant la connexion des câbles d'alimentation en courant CC, assurez-vous que le circuit CC n'est pas sous tension. Localisez le coupe-circuit dans le tableau desservant l'équipement et fixez-le en position OFF. Lors de la connexion de câbles d'alimentation CC, connectez d'abord le conducteur de mise à la terre à la borne correspondante, puis le pôle positif et en dernier, le pôle négatif. Remettez le coupe-circuit en position ON.

Un disjoncteur facilement accessible, adapté et approuvé devrait être intégré à l'installation du bâtiment.

Le disjoncteur devrait déconnecter simultanément les deux pôles si l'alimentation en courant CC est flottante.

Page 13: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Declaration of Conformity

Manufacturer's Name: RAD Data Communications Ltd.

Manufacturer's Address: 24 Raoul Wallenberg St., Tel Aviv 69719, Israel

declares that the product:

Product Name: FCD-E1L

conforms to the following standard(s) or other normative document(s):

EMC: EN 55022:1998 Information technology equipment – Radio disturbance characteristics – Limits and methods of measurement.

EN 50024: 1998 Information technology equipment – Immunity characteristics – Limits and methods of measurement.

Safety: EN 60950: 2000 Safety of information technology equipment.

Supplementary Information:

The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and the R&TTE Directive 99/5/EC for wired equipment. The product was tested in a typical configuration.

Tel Aviv, 18th September 2002

Haim Karshen

VP Quality

European Contact: RAD Data Communications GmbH, Otto-Hahn-Str. 28-30, 85521 Ottobrunn-Riemerling, Germany

Page 14: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf
Page 15: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Configuration Procedure 1

Quick Start Guide

If you are familiar with the FCD-E1L, use this guide to prepare it for operation. For the IP router version, refer to Appendix H.

1. Preliminary Preparations

1. To make internal settings, open the small lid on the FCD-E1L bottom panel.

2. Set the password options and select the source of the database configuration and supervisory port parameters with the DIP switch S1.

3. If you want the E1 learning to be triggered by the front panel AUTO CONFIGURATION button, set the idle code with the DIP switch S2.

4. Connect the E1 link.

5. Connect the data ports.

6. Connect the FCD-E1L to power.

7. Connect the communication port of a PC running a terminal emulation program to the CONTROL-DCE connector of the FCD-E1L (use a straight cable). Configure the PC for 9600 bps, eight data bits, no parity, one stop bit and no flow control.

8. Press the <Enter> key several times in sequence: you should see the FCD-E1L prompt. If you see PASSWORD>, type RAD and then press <Enter> to obtain the prompt.

2. Configuration Procedure

Perform the following actions in the order given below.

Step Action Use the Command

1 Reset the database to the default parameters INIT DB

2 Define terminal control codes DEF TERM

3 Define control port configuration DEF SP DEF CALL

4 Set FCD-E1L system time and date TIME DATE

5 Define system characteristics DEF SYS

6 Configure the main link DEF ML

Page 16: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Quick Start Guide Installation and Operation Manual

2 Configuration Procedure FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Step Action Use the Command

7 Configure the data channels DEF CH 1, DEF CH 2

8 Define the general system parameters DEF NAME DEF NODE DEF PWD DEF AGENT DEF MANAGER LIST

9 Define the alarm handling parameters DEF AR DEF ALM MASK

FCD-E1L is now ready for operation.

Page 17: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 i

Contents

Chapter 1. Introduction 1.1 Overview....................................................................................................................1-1

Product Options......................................................................................................1-1 Application .............................................................................................................1-2 Features .................................................................................................................1-2 Timing Considerations.............................................................................................1-5 Timing ....................................................................................................................1-7 Management ..........................................................................................................1-8

1.2 Physical Description .................................................................................................1-11 1.3 Functional Description..............................................................................................1-12

Functional Block Diagram ......................................................................................1-12 Bus Functions .......................................................................................................1-12 Main Link Interface ...............................................................................................1-14 Synchronous Data Channels..................................................................................1-15 Asynchronous Data Channel RS-232/V.24 .............................................................1-16 Ethernet Interface ................................................................................................1-16 Management Subsystem .......................................................................................1-16 Power Supply Subsystem ......................................................................................1-17

1.4 Technical Specifications............................................................................................1-17

Chapter 2. Installation and Setup 2.1 Introduction...............................................................................................................2-1 2.2 Site Requirements & Prerequisites .............................................................................2-1 2.3 Package Contents ......................................................................................................2-2 2.4 Setting the Internal Jumpers and Switches..................................................................2-2

Introduction............................................................................................................2-2 Setting DIP Switches S1 and S2...............................................................................2-4

2.5 Connecting the Interface Cables .................................................................................2-7 Connecting the E1 Link ...........................................................................................2-7 Connecting the Data Channels ................................................................................2-8 Connecting the CONTROL DCE Port .........................................................................2-9

2.6 Connecting the Power Cables .....................................................................................2-9

Chapter 3. Operation 3.1 Turning FCD-E1L On ...................................................................................................3-1 3.2 Controls and Indicators ..............................................................................................3-2

Front Panel Indications ...........................................................................................3-3 E1 Learning ............................................................................................................3-3 Ethernet Interface Indications .................................................................................3-3

3.3 Default Settings.........................................................................................................3-3 3.4 Configuration Alternatives..........................................................................................3-4 3.5 Working with a Supervisor Terminal ............................................................................3-5

Preliminary Settings for Initial Configuration Session ...............................................3-5 Running a Supervisory Terminal Management Session .............................................3-6 Starting a Session with Multiple FCD-E1L Units ........................................................3-8 Ending a Control Session.........................................................................................3-9

3.6 Working with SNMP Management ...............................................................................3-9

Page 18: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Table of Contents Installation and Operation Manual

ii FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Combining Inband and Out-of-Band Management Capabilities ...............................3-10 Remote Management using Telnet over IP.............................................................3-10 Prevention of Access Conflicts ..............................................................................3-11 Supervisory Terminal Characteristics......................................................................3-12

3.7 FCD-E1L Command Language ...................................................................................3-14 Command Options ................................................................................................3-14 Index of Commands ..............................................................................................3-15

3.8 Turning FCD-E1L Off.................................................................................................3-17

Chapter 4. Configuration 4.1 Configuration Sequence .............................................................................................4-1 4.2 Configuring the Local FCD-E1L....................................................................................4-1 4.3 Configuring the Remote FCD-E1L................................................................................4-3

Chapter 5. Configuring a Typical Application 5.1 Overview....................................................................................................................5-1

Application – Extended LAN Connection ..................................................................5-1 5.2 Configuring DXC-10A..................................................................................................5-2 5.3 Configuring FCD-E1L...................................................................................................5-4

System Configuration..............................................................................................5-4

Chapter 6. Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 6.1 Monitoring Performance.............................................................................................6-1 6.2 Detecting Errors.........................................................................................................6-4 6.3 Handling Alarms.........................................................................................................6-4

Alarm Display..........................................................................................................6-4 Working with Alarm Buffer ......................................................................................6-5 Configuration Error Messages................................................................................6-11

6.4 Troubleshooting.......................................................................................................6-14 6.5 Testing FCD-E1L.......................................................................................................6-15

Operating Loopbacks from a Control Terminal .......................................................6-15 User-Controlled Loopback Tests ............................................................................6-16 Main Link Local Digital Loopback (LP LOC DIG ML)..................................................6-17

6.6 Frequently Asked Questions.....................................................................................6-21 6.7 Technical Support ....................................................................................................6-21

Appendix A. Pinouts Appendix B. SNMP Management Appendix C. Operating Environment Appendix D. Supervision Terminal Commands Appendix E. E1 Learning Appendix F. IR-ETH Interface Module Appendix G. IR-ETH/QN Interface Module Appendix H. IR-IP Interface Module

Page 19: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Overview 1-1

Chapter 1

Introduction

1.1 Overview

The FCD-E1L is a managed single- or dual-port access unit for business applications that integrates voice and data traffic over E1 (2.048 Mbps) and fractional E1 services. FCD-E1L supports advanced management capabilities, including SNMP.

Product Options

FCD-E1L is available in several versions, which differ in the number of data channels, the type of the main link, user data channels, and power supply.

Main Link

The main link has two line interface versions:

• 120Ω balanced line interface terminated in an eight-pin RJ-45 (ISO 10173) connector.

• 75Ω unbalanced interface terminated in two BNC coaxial connectors.

Data Channels

The lower data channel port can be ordered with one of the following synchronous interfaces:

• RS-530

• X.21

• V.35

• V.36/RS-449

The upper data channel port can be ordered with one of the following synchronous, asynchronous, or Ethernet interfaces:

• RS-530

• X.21

• V.35

• V.36/RS-449

• V.24

• IR-ETH, internal Ethernet bridge, 10BaseT

Page 20: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

1-2 Overview FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

• IR-ETH/QN, internal 10/100 Mbps Ethernet bridge with VLAN support (10/100BaseT only)

• IR-IP, IP router, 10BaseT

For information on the IR-ETH, IR-ETH/QN and IR-IP ports, refer to Appendix F, Appendix G, and Appendix H respectively.

Power Supply

FCD-E1L is available with AC (100 to 240 VAC) or DC (-48 VDC) power supplies.

In this manual, the generic term FCD-E1L is used when the information is applicable to all the FCD-E1L versions. Information applicable to a specific version is explicitly identified.

Application

Figure 1-1 shows a typical application where FCD-E1L provides an extension of data services over a TDM E1/Fractional E1 network.

Figure 1-1. Typical FCD-E1L Application

Features

FCD-E1L supports the following kinds of payload-carrying ports:

• E1 main link with ITU-T Rec. G.703 copper interface. This enables direct connection to an E1/fractional E1 network. The main link can be ordered as a BNC or a UTP option. The operating mode of the main link interface, DSU or LTU, is software-selectable. The integral LTU provides a range of up to 2 km.

• Synchronous high-speed data channel, operating at rates of n × 64 kbps, where n = 1 to 31. FCD-E1L also accepts a 2048 kbps data stream and converts it to an ITU-T Rec. G.703 unframed signal for transport over the E1 main link. FCD-E1L can then serve as an interface converter and high-speed, short distance modem.

Note

Page 21: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Overview 1-3

The synchronous data channel can be ordered with RS-530, V.35, V.36/RS-449, or X.21 interface.

• Asynchronous data channel, operating at rates of 64 and 128 kbps. This interface allows FCD-E1L to operate opposite external user equipment at bit rates of 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, or 38.4 kbps. The asynchronous data channel has an RS-232/V.24 interface.

• 10BaseT Ethernet bridge, 10/100BaseT Ethernet bridge with VLAN support, or IP router provide direct connection to the LAN.

The FCD-E1L main link interface is compatible with virtually all carrier-provided E1 services and meets all requirements of ITU-T recommendations G.823, G.703, G.704, G.706 and G.732. It supports either 2 or 16 frames per multiframe, with or without CRC-4. Line code is HDB3.

To meet the specific requirements of user’s applications, FCD-E1L supports various timing modes and enables hierarchical dissemination of timing within the network. Its nodal timing can be locked to the clock signal recovered from the main link, to a data channel, or provided by an internal oscillator.

FCD-E1L operation is controlled and monitored by means of supervision terminals, Telnet hosts, and SNMP management stations. The management connections are either out-of-band, over the FCD-E1L serial management port (directly or through modem links), or inband with the main link carrying the management traffic. This allows FCD-E1L to be fully managed from one or more remote locations, in accordance with specific requirements of the user organization.

Timeslot assignment is programmable, allowing data from each customer port to be placed into timeslots (DS0’s) consecutively or as defined by the user.

FCD-E1L can be ordered with a 100 to 240 VAC or –48 VDC power supply, and has low power consumption.

FCD-E1L is available as a standalone or a wall mount unit. One or two standalone units can be installed in a 19-inch (1U) rack with the optional rack mount adapter kit.

Main Link Interfaces

The FCD-E1L main link meets the requirements of ITU-T Rec. G.703, G.704, G.706, G.732, G.823 and G.826.

The main link offers two line interface versions:

• 120Ω balanced line interface, terminated in an eight-pin RJ-45 connector.

• 75Ω unbalanced interface, terminated in two BNC coaxial connectors.

The operating mode of the main link interface, DSU or LTU, is user-selectable. In DSU mode, maximum line attenuation is up to 10 dB. In LTU mode, maximum line attenuation is up to 36 dB. For typical cables, this provides a range of up to 2 km (1.2 mi). FCD-E1L can be located up to 2 km from the transmission equipment.

The main link interface supports standard E1 framing formats that comply with the requirements of ITU-T Rec. G.704 and G.732. It supports both G732N framing (2 per multiframe) and G732S framing (16 frames per multiframe, also called timeslot 16 multiframes), in accordance with your selection.

Page 22: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

1-4 Overview FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

When operated in unframed mode, FCD-E1L generates an ITU-T Rec. G.703 unframed signal. The synchronous data channel converts a 2048 kbps data stream to an ITU-T Rec. G.703 unframed signal to transport over the E1 main link.

The main link also supports the CRC-4 function in accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.704. The CRC-4 function and the framing mode are user-selectable. Line code is HDB3.

Data Channel Interfaces

The FCD-E1L data channel is available with one of the following types of interfaces: RS-530, V.35, X.21, V.24, or V.36/RS-449. All versions are supplied with a 25-pin D-type female connector.

V.24 interface equipment connects to the RS-232 port of the FCD-E1L using a standard straight cable.

To convert the 25-pin channel interface to standard V.35, X.21, or V.36 interfaces, optional adaptor cables provide the following terminal connectors:

• V.36/RS-449: 37-pin D-type female

• V.35: 34-pin female

• X.21: 15-pin D-type female.

Suitable adapter cables can be ordered from RAD (see Appendix A and Error! Bookmark not defined.).

The serial interface data channel (both sync and async) supports the following control lines:

• RTS - input from the locally connected user’s equipment

• CTS - can be set permanently in the active state, or to follow the RTS line

• DSR - always active when FCD-E1L is powered on, except when remote main link loopback test is active

• DCD - active when the main link interface is synchronized.

Ethernet Interfaces

Ethernet with a 10BaseT interface complies with the IEEE 802.3 and Ethernet V.2 standards. To operate over UTP media, an RJ-45 shielded connector terminates the 10BaseT interface.

For control of Ethernet traffic flowing through the main link, the Ethernet interface is available with the following options:

• Full-feature remote bridge, IR-ETH, 10BaseT. Disable the bridge, to operate the FCD-E1L link as a LAN extender (repeater).

• Full-feature 10/100BaseT remote bridge with VLAN support, IR-ETH/QN

• IP router, 10BaseT. The IP router is configured through its Ethernet interface, using a Telnet host connected to this interface.

Both the bridge and the router operate at wire speed. For more information on the IR-ETH, IR-ETH/QN and IR-IP interfaces, refer to Appendix F, Appendix G, and Appendix H respectively.

Page 23: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Overview 1-5

Timeslot Handling

When operating in any of the framed modes, FCD-E1L allows you to configure the routing of the individual timeslots for the data channels. The routing can be modified during system operation, without disrupting the service to users of timeslots that are not rerouted. FCD-E1L automatically connects the timeslots in both the receive and transmit directions.

You can either individually select the main link timeslots for inserting user data, or use the “bundle” routing mode. Timeslots connected to data channels are always defined as data timeslots.

To insure correct timeslot routing, FCD-E1L automatically checks the validity of the inputs, and alerts inconsistencies and invalid selections with error messages. The conditions reported include:

• Attempted allocation of user-traffic timeslots to reserved system timeslots (Ex.: allocation of timeslot 16 when G732S multiframes are used, or allocation of a timeslot dedicated to the management traffic between two FCD-E1Ls connected in a link)

• Total bandwidth requested exceeds the maximum available main link bandwidth of 31 timeslots (or 30 timeslots when using G732S multiframes, or G732N multiframes with a timeslot dedicated to management; or 29 timeslots when using G732S multiframes and a timeslot dedicated to management.)

• Number of timeslots assigned to the data channel does not match the number required to support the channel data rate.

Handling National Bits

FCD-E1L controls of handling the national bits, Sa4 through Sa8, in timeslot 0. Select the utilization and state of each bit, in accordance with the following options:

• Transferring management traffic: when timeslot 0 carries the inband management traffic, the user can select the Sa bits that carry the traffic.

• Fixed value settings: any bit can be set to “0” or “1”.

Timing Considerations

Main Link Timing Application

Figure 1-2 shows FCD-E1L operating with the main link as the timing reference source, and illustrates the flow of timing signals within the system.

Page 24: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

1-6 Overview FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

FCD-E1L

FCD-E1L

FCD-E1L

DCETiming

MLTiming

DCETiming

MLTiming

DTE1Timing

Master TimingSource

User's DTE

E1Network

User's DTE

User's DTE

LoopbackTiming

Figure 1-2. Main Link Timing, Flow of Timing Signals in a Typical Application

When using the main link as the timing reference, the data channels must use DCE timing. DTE1 timing can also be used if the user’s equipment is connected to the data channels with loopback timing, meaning, the user’s equipment must lock its transmit clock to the receive clock provided by FCD-E1L.

FIFO buffers are used on the data channels to absorb small timing variations (jitter, wander, etc.). FIFO size is automatically selected in accordance with the data channel rate, as listed in Table 1-1.

The main link timing mode is particularly suitable for FCD-E1L units connected to an E1 network that has an accurate master timing source (e.g., PTT or national network). This locks network timing of all equipment connected to FCD-E1L.

Data Channel Timing Application

Figure 1-3 shows the data channel operating in the DTE2 timing mode, as the timing reference source, and illustrates the flow of timing signals within the system.

Customer Premises

User's DTEDCETiming

ML Timing

DataChannel

DTE2Timing

DataNetwork

E1Network

DataChannel

Figure 1-3. Data Channel Timing, Flow of Timing Signals in a Typical Application

Page 25: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Overview 1-7

In Figure 1-3, the data equipment located on the customer’s premises uses the FCD-E1L link to connect to a data network. Since data networks include accurate timing sources and do not accept data whose timing deviates significantly from the network timing, equipment located on the customer’s premises must use the data network timing.

For this purpose, the FCD-E1L connected to the data network uses the data channel as its timing source and its main link timing locks to data network timing. The network timing is transferred to the data equipment located on the customer’s premises.

To optimize jitter performance, the user can manually select the FIFO size of a data channel operating in the DTE2 mode (±16 bits, ±30 bits, ±52 bits, or ±72 bits). The manually selected value cannot be less that the automatically selected values listed in Table 1-1.

Timing

Multiple clock source selection provides maximum system timing flexibility, and supports hierarchical dissemination of timing information.

System Timing Internally, the FCD-E1L uses one system timing source (clock). This system clock determines the transmit timing of the E1 link and the data channels, and the timing of most other signal processing operations.

To achieve maximum flexibility in system integration and enable hierarchical distribution of timing in the system, the FCD-E1L enables you to select the source to which the master clock is locked. The available options are as follows:

• System clock source locked to the recovered receive clock of the main link

• System clock source locked to an external clock (such as the transmit clock applied to the data channels). The timing mode of the data channel must be DTE2.

The DTE2 mode is not available on channels with X.21 and V.24 interfaces, or on the Ethernet interface.

• System clock source locked to the internal crystal oscillator, which has an accuracy of ±50 ppm.

Besides selecting the master clock source, you can specify a fallback source that is automatically selected if master source fails. The fail criteria are: loss of the receive signal on the port selected as the master source, or inactive RTS line on the data channels. The internal oscillator, always used as a fallback source, is automatically selected in case the other selected timing sources fail.

Main Link Timing

FCD-E1L recovers the main link receive clock signal and uses it as the timing source for the receive path. The main link transmit timing source, derived from the main system clock, can be locked to one of the following sources:

• Recovered receive clock

Note

Page 26: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

1-8 Overview FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

• External clock signal (derived from one of the synchronous data channels)

• Internal oscillator.

Synchronous Data Channel Timing

The FCD-E1L data channel has three timing modes:

• DCE – The transmit and receive clock for the user’s equipment are connected to the data channel and are derived from the main system clock.

• DTE1 – The data channel sends the receive data and the receive clock, derived from the main system clock, to the user’s equipment. The channel accepts user data according to the user equipment transmit clock.

• DTE2 – FCD-E1L transmits and receives data according to the clock signals provided by the equipment connected to the data channel. When using this clocking mode, the main link rate must be locked to the clock signal supplied by the user’s data channel interface. The DTE2 mode is not available on channels with X.21 or Ethernet interfaces.

FCD-E1L provides a FIFO buffer for the data channel to absorb timing differences.

FIFO size is generally selected automatically, however, in the DTE2 timing mode the user can select FIFO size to meet specific system requirements.

V.24 Data Channel Timing

The V.24 data channel operates only in the DCE timing mode.

Ethernet Port Timing

The timing of the Ethernet processing circuits is always derived from the main system clock (“DCE” timing). This port cannot be selected as a timing source.

Management

FCD-E1L is designed for unattended operation. The FCD-E1L configuration (that is, the complete collection of its operating parameters) is determined by a database stored in non-volatile memory.

Database management, other configuration tasks, and test and monitoring activities (equipment status enquiry, alarm status and history, test loop activation, performance statistics reading, etc.) can be performed in three ways:

• Supervision Terminal − A supervision terminal can be a “dumb” ASCII terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program. The terminal is connected to the RS-232 port of the FCD-E1L, which contains a stored control program. The terminal can also be connected through a modem link to enable dial-in from a remote location. FCD-E1L supports both point-to-point and multidrop connections.

• SNMP Management − The SNMP management capability enables fully graphical, user-friendly management using the RADview network management stations offered by RAD, as well as management by other SNMP-based management systems.

Page 27: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Overview 1-9

• Telnet − Remote management is also possible using the Telnet communication protocol, which uses TCP/IP communication, without the SNMP service. Telnet support enables a remote IP host to control the operation of FCD-E1L using functions identical to those provided by a supervision terminal.

The communication between the management system and FCD-E1L can take place out-of-band (by connecting to the serial management port) or inband (through the main link). FCD-E1L includes a proprietary IP router for management traffic. The router function enables FCD-E1L to transfer management traffic generated by, or addressed to, other FCD-E1L units, as well as inband management traffic addressed to other RAD equipment that operates over E1 links (such as the Megaplex modular TDM E1/T1 multiplexers, DXC multiservice access nodes, etc.)

E1 Learning

FCD-E1L features plug-and-play connectivity. When connected to the E1 link, the unit automatically detects the E1 parameters and performs autoconfiguration accordingly. This process is called the E1 learning. The E1 learning can be activated via either a push-button on the FCD-E1L front panel or a terminal command. The state of the learning process is indicated by a dedicated LED indicator. In addition, when managed from the terminal, the learning process is accompanied by the terminal messages.

If FCD-E1L has two data channels installed, the timeslot learning is not available.

Dial-In and Dial-Out Capabilities

FCD-E1L supports dial-in/dial-out operations, which can be used for remote out-of-band configuration and monitoring (dial-in). For dial-out operation FCD-E1L activates the modem to automatically dial a pre-programmed number whenever an alarm event occurs.

The remote out-of-band configuration, monitoring and sending callout alarm messages can be done using the ASCII (terminal), PPP, or SLIP protocols.

Alarms

FCD-E1L stores alarms detected during its operation in a buffer that can hold up to 100 alarms. During regular operation, an alarm indicator on the front panel lights when alarms are present in the alarm buffer, to notify the local operator that alarm conditions have been detected. Separate indications are provided for major and minor alarms. The local operator can then review the contents of the alarm buffer using the supervision terminal, a Telnet host, or a management station.

The front-panel LED indicators display in real time the status of the main link, and alert when test loops are present in the system. FCD-E1L can also automatically report alarms to a remote terminal using a dial-up modem. Alarms causing dial-out activities are user-selectable.

The alarms stored in the FCD-E1L alarm buffer can be transmitted automatically through the serial management access port, for display on a supervision terminal;

Note

Page 28: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

1-10 Overview FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

when SNMP management is used, alarms are also sent to user-selected management stations as traps.

The CONTROL DCE port can be configured to operate as a dial-out port, for automatic reporting of alarms to remote locations. The port is intended for connection to a Hayes™ or Hayes-compatible dial-up modem. You can program the reporting method in accordance with the following options:

• Always send a report whenever a new alarm condition is detected.

• Send a report only upon the detection of a major alarm.

• Reporting disabled (no dial-out function).

When it is necessary to report an alarm condition, FCD-E1L initiates the call setup, and then, after the destination answers, sends the complete contents of the alarm buffer. Following the transmission of the alarm buffer contents, FCD-E1L disconnects automatically.

To increase reporting reliability, you can define the number of dialing retries, and an alternate directory number to be called in case the primary directory number cannot be reached. If nevertheless the call cannot be established, the full contents of the buffer will be sent the next time a call is set up.

To expedite the handling of alarms and reduce the information load during system malfunctions, the system operator can mask alarm conditions, to prevent continuous reporting of known alarm conditions, e.g., during maintenance activities.

Statistics Collection

FCD-E1L collects and stores E1 port statistics in compliance with ITU-T rec. G.706, G.826, with local support as per RFC 4016.

These statistics can be retrieved either from the management station (RADview), or via the supervision terminal.

Diagnostics

FCD-E1L has comprehensive diagnostics capabilities that include user-activated local and remote loopbacks on the data channel with serial interface and on the main link.

The data channel can response to a FT1/FE1 inband loopback code that can be generated from a remote FCD family product or the DXC in specific bundle of timeslots that are allocated to that port. This loopback is available on the onboard channel (CH1) only.

To enable testing of marginal links, FCD-E1L also offers bit error rate (BER) testing on the data channel with serial interface (CH1 only), using a locally generated pseudorandom sequence. To provide compatibility with other BER testing equipment, the user can select the pseudorandom pattern.

Page 29: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Physical Description 1-11

1.2 Physical Description

FCD-E1L is a compact standalone unit, intended for installation on desktops or shelves. Unit height is only 1U (1.75"). An optional rack-mount adapter kit enables the installation of one or two FCD-E1L units in a 19" rack.

FCD-E1L is cooled by free air convection, and does not include internal fans.

Figure 1-4 shows a typical FCD-E1L unit.

The front panel includes activity LEDs, the supervision terminal connector for controlling and monitoring the FCD-E1L operation and the auto-configuration button and LED. For details, see Chapter 3.

The rear panel of the unit includes the main link and the user data channel connectors. For details, see Chapter 2. The rear panels of the Ethernet bridge and IP router versions include, in addition, status indicators for controlling the operation of the corresponding interfaces. The IP router version also includes a DIP switch. The switch settings and LED indications for these equipment versions are described in Appendix F, Appendix G , and Appendix H.

Figure 1-4. FCD-E1L, 3D View

The bottom part of the unit provides access to the S1 and S2 DIP switches. These switches are described in Chapter 2.

Page 30: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

1-12 Functional Description FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

1.3 Functional Description

Functional Block Diagram

Figure 1-5 shows the functional block diagram of the FCD-E1L system. FCD-E1L includes several main subsystems:

• Chassis buses

• Main link interface

• User interface subsystem (Data channels with serial interface or Ethernet port)

• Management subsystem

• Power supply subsystem.

The characteristics of the various subsystems are explained below.

Bus Functions

The FCD-E1L system performs its various functions by controlling the flow of data among the various user and main link interfaces in accordance with the application requirements.

The flow of data is performed through the FCD-E1L buses, as shown in Figure 1-5. FCD-E1L comprises several buses:

• TDM bus, which carries the data to the main link. The TDM bus serves as a highway through which all the information processed by the FCD-E1L flows. The information is deposited and collected in discrete time intervals, called timeslots (one timeslot supports a data rate of 64 kbps – see Error! Bookmark not defined.). The TDM bus consists of two lines:

TSER line – carries the transmit data to the main link interface. The other interfaces deposit data on this line, in the timeslots specified by the management subsystem.

RSER line – carries the data received by the main link interface. The other interfaces read their data from the timeslots specified by the management subsystem.

Each FCD-E1L port deposits payload information received through its external interface on one TDM bus line, and simultaneously collects the information to be sent through the external interface from the other line. Therefore, considerable flexibility is available with respect to routing, because each port has access to all the payload information, and can be instructed by the management subsystem to read and write the desired information in the desired timeslots of the FCD-E1L TDM bus.

Page 31: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Functional Description 1-13

FCD-E1L

RSE

R

TSER

Control Logic

InbandManagement

Interface

Management Subsystem

Internal Voltages

FuseAC Input

PowerConnector

MainPower Supply

FCD-E1L (CPU)

Front PanelSerial PortInterface

Framer

Main Link

Main Link PortLIU

Data ChannelPort

Data ChannelInterface

Clo

ck B

us

Add

ress

Bus

Dat

a B

us

TDM

Bus

Control Port

Data Channelor Ethernet

Port

Data Channelor Ethernet Interface

Figure 1-5. FCD-E1L Functional Block Diagram

• Clock bus, which carries the various clock signals used by the FCD-E1L system. The FCD-E1L can lock its system clock (see the Timing section on page 1-5) to various clock signals applied to its user ports, in accordance with the application requirements.

• Two management buses:

Address bus – carries routing information from the management subsystem to the other subsystems.

Data Bus – carries the internal management data.

Page 32: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

1-14 Functional Description FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Main Link Interface

The main link interface includes the main link port and the framer with an integrated LIU (line interface unit). The characteristics of the main link interface are described in Main Link Interfaces on page 1-4. The main functions of the main link interface are described below.

Framer

The transmit path of the framer generates the E1 frame structure transmitted by the main link port, in accordance with the selected framing mode. The frame structure is generated by combining the data retrieved from the prescribed timeslots of the TSER line with the framing overhead. The TSER line may also carry inband management data generated by the management subsystem when the main link framing mode is G732S or G732N. Unused timeslots are filled with the idle code.

The receive path of the framer extracts the payload data, the inband management data stream and demultiplexes the incoming E1 data stream.

The framer also collects performance statistics based on framing errors and errors detected by the CRC-4 monitoring function, which can be read by the management subsystem through the module management subsystem.

When the main link is operated in the unframed mode, the framer is bypassed. As a result, the main link transparently transfers the data stream received from the appropriate data channel.

If FCD-E1L has two data channels, channel 2 is automatically set to operate in the unframed mode. In a single-channel FCD-E1L, the unframed data stream passes through channel 1.

LIU

The transmit path of the LIU includes an HDB3 coder, which converts the NRZ transmit data stream provided by the E1 framer to the line code specified for use on E1 links, and then generates the E1 transmit signal in accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.703.

The receive path of the LIU recovers the received E1 signal and the associated clock signal. The recovered clock signal is used by other module circuits, and is also applied on the clock bus. The recovered E1 signal is decoded by an HDB3 decoder, and sent to the receive path of the E1 framer in NRZ format.

The operating mode of the LIU receive path, DSU or LTU, is user-selectable.

The HDB3 decoder can provide performance statistics for evaluating line transmission quality when the CRC-4 option is not used, by collecting data on the bipolar violations (BPVs) detected in the incoming signal.

Note

Page 33: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Functional Description 1-15

Synchronous Data Channels

The data channels operate as synchronous ports, which connect to the TDM bus via a bus interface. The data channels perform two main functions:

• In the output (receive) direction, the bus interface reads the payload data from the appropriate timeslots of the TSER line, under the control of the management subsystem, and generates a continuous n×64 kbps data stream. The data stream is accompanied by a clock signal derived from the internal FCD-E1L system clock.

The transmit data and clock signals are then applied to the channel interface, which provides the interface to the external (user’s) equipment. The interface can be ordered from one of the following options: RS-530, V.35, X.21, and V.36/RS-449.

• In the input (transmit) direction, the user’s data applied to the input of the channel interface is placed in the appropriate timeslots of the RSER line, under the control of the management subsystem.

To enable synchronous operation, FIFO buffers are used to absorb timing variations (jitter, wander, etc.). In all the data channel timing modes, the FIFO size is automatically selected in accordance with the data channel rate, as listed in Table 1-1. The values listed in Table 1-1 are selected in accordance with the limits specified in the applicable standards.

In addition, when using the DTE2 mode, the FIFO size can also be manually selected, to enable the user to increase FIFO size when the jitter exceeds the expected limits.

Table 1-1. FIFO Size vs Data Channel Rate

Data Channel Rate (kbps)

FIFO Size (bits)

64 ±16

128 and 192 ±30

256 through 512 ±52

576 through 1024 ±72

1088 through 1792 ±52

1856 and 1920 ±30

1984 ±16

Page 34: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

1-16 Functional Description FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

In addition to payload data, the data channel interfaces handle two additional types of signals:

• Clock signals. The direction of the clock signals depends on the data channel timing mode, DCE, DTE1, or DTE2. The timing modes are explained in the Synchronous Data Channel Timing section on page 1-8.

In the DTE2 mode, the clock signal applied to the transmit input is connected to the clock bus and can be selected as an FCD-E1L system timing reference.

• Handshaking signals. The handshaking signals are used to control the exchange of signals with the user’s equipment, in accordance with the protocol applying to the installed data channel interface. The handshaking is performed under the control of the management subsystem.

The functions of the handshaking signals are explained in the Data Channel Interfaces section on page 1-4.

Asynchronous Data Channel RS-232/V.24

This interface allows FCD-E1L to operate opposite external user equipment at bit rates 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, or 38.4 kbps. The data rate of the V.24 port can be selected between 64 kbps and 128 kbps.

Ethernet Interface

For description of the IR-ETH, IR-ETH/QN and IR-IP interfaces, refer to Appendix F, Appendix G, and Appendix H respectively.

The timing mode of the Ethernet channel interface is always DCE, that is, the timing of the receive and transmit paths is always locked to the FCD-E1L system clock.

Management Subsystem

The management subsystem controls FCD-E1L operation, in accordance with its operating software. The basic capabilities of the management subsystem are presented in the Main Characteristics on page 1-4. The management subsystem also includes an SNMP agent, and a proprietary IP router for SNMP management traffic.

The management subsystem exchanges information and sends commands through several ports:

• The communication with the various internal subsystems of the FCD-E1L is performed through the management address and data buses. The subsystem also controls the front-panel indicators.

• The communication with the supervision terminal is performed through the front panel RS-232 serial port interface. This port is used to perform the initial configuration of the FCD-E1L, using any standard ASCII (“dumb”) terminal (or PC running a basic communication or terminal emulation program). After the initial configuration, the port can be used to control and monitor FCD-E1L operation.

Page 35: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Technical Specifications 1-17

• When inband management is enabled, the management subsystem transmits and receives management traffic through the E1 port. The communication with the E1 port is made through the TDM bus.

Power Supply Subsystem

FCD-E1L can be powered by 100 to 240 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz, or by -48 VDC, in accordance with order. Figure 1-5 shows an AC-powered FCD-E1L:

• The AC input voltage passes through a protection fuse located in the AC input connector (on the DC-powered FCD-E1L, the fuse is internal).

• The AC input voltage is applied to the main power supply voltage, which generates the regulated voltages required for the FCD-E1L internal circuits.

1.4 Technical Specifications

E1 Main Link Compliance ITU-T G.703, G.704, G.706, G.732, G.826

Framing G732N, 2 or 16 frames per multiframe, CRC-4 option enabled or disabled

Bit Rate 2.048 Mbps (±50ppm)

Line Code HDB3

Line Impedance

Balanced interface 120Ω

Unbalanced interface 75Ω

Signal Levels

Transmit level

Balanced Interface ±3V ±10%

Unbalanced Interface ±2.37V ±10%

Receive level

LTU mode 0 to –36 dB

DSU mode 0 to –10 dB

Jitter Performance Per ITU-T Rec. G.823

Connectors

Balanced interface RJ-45 (ISO 10173) 8-pin connector

Page 36: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

1-18 Technical Specifications FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Unbalanced interface Two BNC coaxial connectors

Timing

Receive timing Always recovered from received data signal

Transmit timing (user-selectable)

Internal ±50 ppm oscillator

External timing Locked to the transmit clock of the data channel or to the receive main link, allowed range ±130 ppm

Loopback timing Locked to the recovered receive clock, allowed range ±130 ppm

Synchronous User Data Channels

Data Channel Interface V.35, X.21, V.36/RS-449, or RS-530, according to order

Data Channel Connectors RS-530 interface: 25-pin D-type female

V.35 interface: 34-pin female via adapter cable

V.36/RS-449 interface: 37-pin D-type female via adapter cable

X.21 interface: 15-pin, D-type female via adapter cable

Bit Rates N × 64 kbps, where n equals 1, 2, 3, ....., 31

Timing Modes

DCE Receive and transmit clocks to the synchronous DTE

DTE1 Receive clock to the synchronous device, and transmit clock from the synchronous device

DTE2 Receive and transmit clock from the synchronous DCE

Control Signals CTS follows RTS or constantly ON, software selectable

DSR constantly ON, except during the remote main link loopback

DCD constantly ON, except during loss of synchronization alarm on main link

Page 37: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Technical Specifications 1-19

Timeslot allocation Sequential timeslots (bundled)

User-defined

RS-232/V.24 Asynchronous User Data Port

Interface RS-232/V.24

Connectors 25-pin D-type female

Bit Rates 64 kbps or 128 kbps. Allows operation opposite external user equipment at bit rates 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, or 38.4 kbps

Timing Mode DCE: receive and transmit clocks to the asynchronous DTE

Control Signals CTS follows RTS or constantly ON, software selectable

DSR constantly ON, except during the remote main link loopback

DCD constantly ON, except during loss of synchronization alarm on main link

Timeslot allocation Sequential timeslots (bundled)

User-defined

Ethernet Ports For technical specifications of the IR-ETH, IR-ETH/QN and IR-IP interfaces, refer to Appendix F, Appendix G, and Appendix H respectively.

Supervisory and Management Port

Interface V.24/RS-232 (asynchronous)

Port connectors 9-pin D-type female

Data rates 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200 bps, with automatic detection of data rate (Autobaud)

Data word format One start bit

7 or 8 data bits

Even, odd, or no parity

One stop bit

Dial-in capabilities Supports all the supervisory port functions

Dial-out capabilities Automatic reporting of alarms to remote locations; alarms causing dial-out activities are user-selectable

Page 38: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

1-20 Technical Specifications FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Management Full control over FCD-E1L operation via the DCE CONTROL port, using supervision (“dumb”) terminal, SNMP or Telnet (SLIP or PPP), for remote monitoring and remote data collection

Inband remote management Through timeslot 0 (any sequence of Sa4 through Sa8 bits) using proprietary protocol with dynamic routing

Through dedicated timeslot using reliable proprietary protocol

Out-of-band remote management

SLIP or PPP protocol

Diagnostics Test Loops

E1 main link local analog loopback, towards the local DTE

E1 main link local digital loopback, towards the local DTE

E1 main link remote analog loopback, towards the remote DTE

Channel loopback, towards the remote DTE (Channels 1 and 2)

Channel loopback, towards the local DTE (Channels 1 and 2)

BER test on selected timeslots of the data channel (Channel 1 only)

Inband FT1/FE1 code-activated loopback on the data channel (Channel 1 only)

Note: No loopback can be activated for the Ethernet interfaces

Statistics Collection

As per ITU-T rec. G.706, G.826 with local support as per RFC 4016

Alarms Alarm Buffer Alarm buffer size: 100 alarms

Last 100 alarms are stored and available for retrieval. Each alarm is time stamped.

Page 39: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Technical Specifications 1-21

Indicators Front Panel Indicators PWR – FCD-E1L is powered (green)

SYNC LOSS LOC – Loss of local synchronization alarm on the main link (red)

SYNC LOSS REM – Loss of remote synchronization alarm on the main link (red)

TEST – test active (yellow)

ALM MAJ/ALM MIN– major/minor alarm indication (red)

AUTO CONFIGURATION – E1 learning state indication: off, green (on or blinking), red (on or blinking)

Rear Panel Ethernet Interface Indicators

For technical specifications of the IR-ETH, IR-ETH/QN and IR-IP interfaces, refer to Appendix F, Appendix G, and Appendix H respectively.

Physical Characteristics

Height 44 mm (1.75 in 1U)

Width 215 mm (8.5 in)

Depth 243 mm (9.6 in)

Weight (approx.) 0.9 kg (2.0 lb)

Power Supply Voltage

AC Source 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

DC Source -48 VDC nominal (-40 to -57 VDC)

Power Consumption 5W max.

Environment Operating Temperature 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F)

Relative Humidity Up to 90%, non-condensing

Page 40: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual

1-22 Technical Specifications FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Page 41: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Site Requirements & Prerequisites 2-1

Chapter 2

Installation and Setup

2.1 Introduction

This chapter provides instructions for mechanical and electrical installation of the FCD-E1L unit.

Before performing any internal settings, adjustment, maintenance, or repairs, first disconnect all the cables from the FCD-E1L.

Internal settings, adjustment, maintenance, and repairs may be performed only by a skilled technician who is aware of the hazards involved.

Always observe standard safety precautions during installation, operation, and maintenance of this product.

Before installing the product, review Handling Energized Products at the beginning of the manual.

2.2 Site Requirements & Prerequisites

FCD-E1L is a standalone device intended for tabletop or bench installation. It is delivered completely assembled. No provision is made for bolting the unit on the tabletop. For installation of one or two units in a 19-inch rack, refer to the Rack Mounting Kit for 19-inch Racks guide that comes with the RM kit.

AC-powered FCD-E1L units should be installed within 1.5m (5 feet) of an easily accessible grounded AC outlet capable of furnishing the required supply voltage (100 to 240 VAC).

DC-powered FCD-E1L units require a -48 VDC (-40 to -57 VDC) power source. The power source must be adequately isolated from the mains supply.

• Allow at least 90 cm (36 inches) of frontal clearance for operating and maintenance accessibility.

• Allow at least 10 cm (4 inches) clearance at the rear of the unit for signal lines and interface cables.

The ambient operating temperature of FCD-E1L is 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F), at a relative humidity of up to 90%, non-condensing.

Warning

Note

Page 42: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual

2-2 Setting the Internal Jumpers and Switches FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

The FCD-E1L units are cooled by free air convection; therefore in rack installations it is necessary to leave sufficient space (at least 1U) above and below each unit, to enable free airflow.

FCD-E1L is designed to comply with various electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) standards. To meet these standards, it is necessary to connect the FCD-E1L case to a low-resistance grounding system.

2.3 Package Contents

The FCD-E1L package includes the following items:

• FCD-E1L unit

• Multiservice Access Devices and Intelligent CLEs CD-ROM

• AC power cord or DC power supply connector kit

• RM kit (if ordered)

• Interface adapter cable(s), in accordance with order (see Connecting the Data Channel on page 2-8.

2.4 Setting the Internal Jumpers and Switches

Introduction

The FCD-E1L construction allows you a convenient access to the DIP switches S1 and S2 that may be used in operation. These switches are located on the rear (print) side of the main board and are easily accessed by opening a small lid on the FCD-E1L bottom panel.

The component side of the main board contains the interface selection jumpers J4, J5, J7 and JP13, JP16, all permanently set at the factory according to the interface ordered. Do not move these jumpers from their factory positions!

FCD-E1L comes in single data channel or two data channel versions. The data channel 1 interface board does not include user settings.

The data channel 2 interface or its replacement (in accordance with the FCD-E1L version) board can represent one of the following:

a serial port (does not include user settings)

IR-IP interface board (does not include user settings)

IR-ETH interface board (do not include user settings)

IR-ETH/QN interface board (includes user settings – for installation, see Appendix G)

The data channel 2 interface board (if ordered) is attached to the main board as shown in Figure 2-1.

Note

Page 43: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Setting the Internal Jumpers and Switches 2-3

Although the IR-ETH interface board contains an additional DIP switch on board, it is not in use because the corresponding functions are software-controlled. The IR-IP DIP switch is accessed from the FCD-E1L rear panel. Due to such construction, there is no need in opening the FCD-E1L case for these versions.

To control the Ethernet transmission parameters of the IR-ETH/QN interface version, you have to use the internal DIP switch located on its interface board. The access to this switch is described in Appendix G.

PowerConnectorE1 Link

Connector(BNC or UTP)

PowerSupply

CHANNEL 2,IR-ETH,

or IR-IPInterface

Board

IR-ETH/QN,

F9

Figure 2-1. FCD-E1L Main Board

Page 44: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual

2-4 Setting the Internal Jumpers and Switches FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Setting DIP Switches S1 and S2

LALLDL

DEF PARPASSWORD

DB INITRESERVED

MSB

“1”“0”

LSB

S1

S2

OFFON

Figure 2-2. Location of S1 and S2 DIP Switches

1. Locate a small lid on the bottom panel at the rear of the FCD-E1L unit and open it to gain access to the DIP switches.

2. Set the password options and select the source of the database configuration and supervisory port parameters with the DIP switch S1 in accordance with Table 2-1.

3. If you have chosen the E1 learning to be triggered from the front panel (by the AUTO CONFIGURATION button), set the idle code with the DIP switch S2. Use Table 2-2 to convert the idle code value from the hexadecimal to binary notation.

Page 45: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Setting the Internal Jumpers and Switches 2-5

Table 2-1. DIP Switches S1 and S2

DIP Switch Description Values*

Configuration switch,

S1

The switch controls reloading of default parameter values of the FCD-E1L.

E1 AUTO-CONFIG

Section 1

Will be used in the future versions.

DB INIT

Section 2

This section selects the source of the database

configuration parameters.

FCD-E1L is delivered with the database loaded with

the default parameters. You can select this

position again to restart with the default

parameters in case the current values are not

known.

ON – FCD-E1L loads the default

parameters from the EPROM on power-

up.

OFF – FCD-E1L loads the user-selected

parameters from its non-volatile memory

on power-up.

Note: User-selected parameter values are not erased by setting the DB INIT section to ON. Only when FCD-E1L is turned off and then powered again, the default values replace the user values.

PASSWORD

Section 3

FCD-E1L is delivered with a default password, RAD.

However, to prevent unauthorized personnel from

using the FCD-E1L supervision program, you can

use a password of your own consisting of up to

eight alphanumeric characters.

The FCD-E1L polling address (node number) is also

affected by Section 3: with the jumper set at ON,

the node number is set to 0.

Upon first-time operation, use the ON position to

start the configuration. You can select this position

again to restart with the default password and

node address 0 in case the current user password

was lost.

ON – FCD-E1L uses the default

password.

OFF – FCD-E1L uses the user-defined

password.

Note: You can configure the supervisory port to operate without password protection (by means of DEF SP command). In this case, no password is used, irrespective of the position of the switch section.

DEF PAR

Section 4

This section selects the source of the supervisory

port parameters.

ON – FCD-E1L loads the default

parameters stored in its EPROM

(9600 bps, 8 data bits, no parity, one

stop bit, terminal mode).

OFF – Supervisory port operates

according to user-defined parameters.

Note: User-selected parameter values are not erased by setting one or more sections of the DIP switch S1 to ON: this action merely causes FCD-E1L to use the default values. However, if FCD-E1L is turned off and then powered again, the default values replace the user values.

* The value shown in bold is the default factory setting.

Page 46: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual

2-6 Setting the Internal Jumpers and Switches FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Table 2-1. DIP Switches S1 and S2 (Cont.)

DIP Switch Description Values*

LDL

Section 5

This section enables hardware-controlled

activation of a local digital loopback on Channel

1 of the FCD-E1L.

ON – activates the local digital loopback on

Channel 1, provided there is no software

control intervention.

OFF – deactivates the local digital loopback

on Channel 1, provided there is no software

control intervention.

LAL

Section 6

This section enables hardware-controlled

activation of a local analog loopback on the

FCD-E1L main link.

ON – activates the local analog loopback on

the main link, provided there is no software

control intervention.

OFF – deactivates the local analog loopback

on the main link, provided there is no

software control intervention.

Note: If software loopback control has been activated prior to changing the position of switch sections 5 or 6, then moving the switch section will reverse the action of a corresponding software command. For example, setting the LDL section to ON after a LP LOC CH 1 loopback has been activated from the terminal, deactivates the loopback. For this reason, RAD does not recommend using hardware and software loopback control simultaneously.

Idle Code switch,

S2

Sets the idle code in case when the E1 learning

is triggered by the front panel button.

"0", "1"

* The value shown in bold is the default factory setting.

To set the idle code value on the DIP switch S2, you have to convert it from the hexadecimal to binary notation. Table 2-2 lists the binary codes of the ten decimal numbers and six alphabetic characters used in the hexadecimal notation.

Table 2-2. Converting to Binary Code

Hex Equivalent Binary Code

0 0000 1 0001 2 0010 3 0011 4 0100 5 0101 6 0110 7 0111 8 1000 9 1001 A 1010 B 1011

Page 47: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Connecting the Interface Cables 2-7

Hex Equivalent Binary Code

C 1100 D 1101 E 1110 F 1111

2.5 Connecting the Interface Cables

Connecting the E1 Link

The connectors located on the rear panels of FCD-E1L depend on the equipment version.

The main link is supplied in two versions:

• 120Ω balanced line interface, terminated in an RJ-45 eight-pin connector

• 75Ω unbalanced interface, terminated in two BNC coaxial connectors.

Appendix A provides the pin allocation for the RJ-45 connector.

Figure 2-3 shows a typical AC-powered FCD-E1L rear panel with a balanced main link.

Figure 2-4 shows a typical DC-powered FCD-E1L rear panel with an unbalanced BNC main link.

: FOR CONTINUED

TYPE AND RATING OF FUSE.FIRE, REPLACE ONLY WITH SAMEPROTECTION AGAINST RISK OFCAUTION

CH1

CH2

E1

Figure 2-3. Typical FCD-E1L Rear Panel No. 1

CH1

CH2RX-INTX-OUT

E1VDC-IN

-480

Figure 2-4. Typical FCD-E1L Rear Panel No. 2

To connect the balanced main link:

• Connect the cable to the RJ-45 connector designated E1 (see Appendix A for pin allocation).

To connect the unbalanced main link:

• Connect the cable to the two BNC connectors designated TX OUT (transmit output) and RX IN (receive input).

Page 48: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual

2-8 Connecting the Interface Cables FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Pay attention to correct connection of the transmit and receive cables to the TX and RX connectors of each interface.

Connecting the Data Channels

Serial Data Ports

The serial data ports of FCD-E1L are terminated in a 25-pin D-type female connector. The connector wiring is given in Appendix A. The interface type is RS-530, V.35, V.36/RS-449, V.24 or X.21, according to order.

• When using the RS-530 or V.24 interface, equipment with RS-530 or, respectively, V.24 interface can be directly connected to the data channel connector using standard cables.

• When the interface type is V.35, the adapter cable is terminated in a 34-pin female connector.

• When the interface type is V.36/RS-449, the adapter cable is terminated in a 37-pin D-type female connector.

• When the interface type is X.21, the adapter cable is terminated in a 15-pin D-type female connector.

When using adapter cables, first connect the adapter cable to the channel connector, and then connect the user’s data cable to the adapter connector.

The cables for DCE clock mode are supplied in accordance with order. Cables for DTE1 and DTE2 clock modes can be prepared in accordance with the port connector wiring information given in Appendix A or ordered separately from RAD. The use of each cable is listed in Table 2-3. Appendix A provides pin allocations and cable wiring data.

Table 2-3. FCD-E1L Interface Adapter Cables

Cable User Interface Clock Mode Length [m] [ft]

CBL-HS2/V/1 V.35 DCE 2 6

CBL-HS2/V/2 V.35 DTE1 2 6

CBL-HS2/V/3 V.35 DTE2 2 6

CBL-HS2/R/1 V.36/RS-449 DCE 2 6

CBL-HS2/R/2 V.36/RS-449 DTE1 2 6

CBL-HS2/R/3 V.36/RS-449 DTE2 2 6

CBL-HS2/X/1 X.21 DCE 2 6

Ethernet Data Channel

For information on the IR-ETH, IR-ETH/QN and IR-IP ports, refer to Appendix F, Appendix G, and Appendix H respectively.

Page 49: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Connecting the Power Cables 2-9

Connecting the CONTROL DCE Port

The front panel CONTROL DCE supervisory port has a 9-pin D-type female connector with RS-232 interface. The interface (DCE or DTE) is software-selectable. The default selection, DCE, enables direct connection to terminals and management stations; when the interface is configured as DTE, it is necessary to use a crossed adapter cable.

Appendix A provides the pin allocation for the connector.

2.6 Connecting the Power Cables

To connect the power to FCD-E1L, refer to the appropriate section below, depending on your version of the unit (AC or DC).

BEFORE POWERING UP AN AC POWERED FCD-E1L, verify that the socket outlet is provided with a protective earth contact. If you are using an extension cord (power cable) make sure it is grounded as well.

Make sure that only fuses with the required rated current and of the specified type, as marked on the FCD-E1L rear panel, are used for replacement. Use of repaired fuses and short-circuiting of fuse holders is forbidden. Whenever it is likely that the protection offered by fuses has been impaired, the instrument must be made inoperative and be secured against any unintended operation.

AC Power Connection

AC power should be supplied to FCD-E1L through the 1.5m (5 ft) standard power cable terminated by a standard 3-prong plug. The power cable is provided with the unit.

To connect AC power to FCD-E1L:

1. Connect the power cable to the power connector on the FCD-E1L rear panel.

2. Connect the power cable to the mains outlet.

DC Power Connection

To connect DC power to FCD-E1L:

Refer to DC Power Connection Supplement.

Warning

Page 50: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual

2-10 Connecting the Power Cables FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Page 51: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Turning FCD-E1L On 3-1

Chapter 3

Operation

This chapter contains instructions for operating FCD-E1L. The information presented in this chapter includes:

• Turning FCD-E1L on

• Controls and indicators

• Default settings

• Configuration alternatives

• Turning FCD-E1L off

3.1 Turning FCD-E1L On

To turn FCD-E1L on, connect it to the power supply. When pressing <Enter>, FCD-E1L performs a self-test. If the supervision terminal is connected, FCD-E1L notifies you of the results of its power-up self-test:

FCD Self Test in Progress ... OK

or

FCD Self Test in Progress ... Failed

If the self-test failed you must repair or replace FCD-E1L before you can continue using it.

If FCD-E1L successfully passed the power-up self-test, it sends the following message:

FCD Supervisory Port On Line. Type ‘H’ For Help

If the configuration data stored by FCD-E1 is corrupted FCD-E1L reports that the self-test has failed or sends the DATABASE CHECKSUM ERROR alarm message.

In this case, you must load the default configuration by entering the INIT DB command from the terminal or:

To load the default configuration:

1. Turn FCD-E1L off.

2. Set section 2, DB INIT, of the internal DIP switch S1 to ON.

3. Turn FCD-E1L on.

4. Turn FCD-E1L off.

5. Set section 2, DB INIT, of the internal DIP switch S1 to OFF.

Page 52: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 3 Operation Installation and Operation Manual

3-2 Controls and Indicators FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Now FCD-E1L is ready for operation.

3.2 Controls and Indicators The front panel of FCD-E1L includes a series of LED indicators that show the current operating status of the unit, the AUTO CONFIGURATION push-button, and a proprietary 9-pin connector (CONTROL DCE) for connection to a terminal.

Figure 3-1. FCD-E1L Front Panel

Figure 3-1 shows the FCD-E1L front panel. Table 3-1 lists and describes the FCD-E1L controls and indicators.

Table 3-1. Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Name Type/Color Function

PWR LED (green) Lights when power is ON.

SYNC LOSS – LOC LED (red) Lights to indicate local loss of synchronization on the E1 link

SYNC LOSS – REM LED (red) Lights to indicate remote loss of synchronization on the E1

link

ALM – MAJ LED (red) Lights to indicate that a major alarm condition is present in

the system

ALM – MIN LED (red) Lights to indicate that a minor alarm condition is present in

the system

TST LED (yellow) Lights when a test is active

AUTO

CONFIGURATION

LED (green or red) See Appendix E

AUTO

CONFIGURATION

Push-button Activates the E1 learning process

CONTROL DCE Connector Provides connection to a supervision terminal or management

station

In addition to front panel controls and indicators, FCD-E1L versions with IR-ETH, IIR-ETH/QN and IP router interfaces contain additional controls and indicators on their rear panels. For description, see Appendix F, Appendix G, and Appendix H respectively.

Note

Page 53: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Default Settings 3-3

Front Panel Indications

During normal operation, the ALM, SYNC LOSS, and TST indicators are off.

Any alarm condition causes the ALM indicator to light. Use the supervision terminal to read the alarm messages.

If any of the main link alarm indicators or the TST indicator lights, data transfer is interrupted.

The TST indicator lights when a test is activated. If the test is activated from the local FCD-E1L, see the test type using the supervision terminal (DSP ST CH1, DSP ST CH2, or DSP ST ML). You can disconnect a local loop by means of the CLR LOOP command, as explained in Appendix D.

• A LOC indicator lights when a local loss of synchronization condition is present on the main link.

• A REM indicator lights when a remote loss of synchronization condition is present on the main link.

E1 Learning

If you choose the E1 learning process to be activated from the front panel, the learning process status is indicated by the dedicated AUTO CONFIGURATION indicator. For detailed description of the learning process and its operation from the front panel and the supervisory terminal, see Appendix E.

Ethernet Interface Indications

For information concerning the IR-ETH, IR-ETH/QN and IR-IP interface indicators, refer to Appendix F, Appendix G, and Appendix H respectively.

3.3 Default Settings

FCD-E1L operating mode is determined by a set of parameters stored in the internal non-volatile memory. To select these parameters, use the FCD-E1L supervision terminal.

After the operating parameters have been loaded (a process called configuration setup), FCD-E1L no longer requires operator attendance.

The configuration stored in the FCD-E1L memory is not affected when power is turned off. Upon turn-on, FCD-E1L checks the validity of the stored configuration data, and after the self-test, takes the last selected configuration. If the configuration does not require modification, FCD-E1L is ready for operation immediately after power is applied. However, if the configuration data is corrupted, FCD-E1L loads a default configuration instead. The default configuration, prepared by the manufacturer, is stored in the program EPROM.

If you make a configuration error (for example, you select a parameter value that conflicts with the current operating mode), FCD-E1L rejects the erroneous selection and displays an error message that identifies the error.

Page 54: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 3 Operation Installation and Operation Manual

3-4 Configuration Alternatives FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

3.4 Configuration Alternatives

The FCD-E1L system is designed for unattended operation. The configuration of the FCD-E1L system, that is, a complete collection of operating parameters, is determined by a database stored in non-volatile memory located in the management subsystem. The database is automatically loaded upon FCD-E1L turn-on, thereby enabling the FCD-E1L to automatically return to its last operating configuration.

In addition, FCD-E1L stores a set of factory-default parameters, which can be used to start the configuration of a new FCD-E1L unit; the default parameters can also be loaded in case the user’s database is corrupted.

FCD-E1L database management, as well as the other configuration, test and monitoring activities (equipment status reading, alarm status and history, activation of test loops, reading of performance statistics, etc.) can be performed in three ways:

• Supervision Terminal. A “dumb” ASCII terminal (or a PC running a terminal emulation program), connected to the front-panel RS-232 serial port of the management subsystem installed in the FCD-E1L, can be used as a supervision terminal. The connection can be made either directly, or through modem or low-speed data links. The FCD-E1L system supports both point-to-point and multidrop connections.

The program stored in the FCD-E1L management subsystem controls the supervision terminal.

• SNMP Management. The SNMP management capability enables fully graphical, user-friendly management using the RADview network management stations offered by RAD, as well as management by generic SNMP-based management systems.

• Telnet. Remote management is also possible using the Telnet communication protocol, which enables management using IP communication in parallel with the use of SNMP. Telnet support enables a remote IP host to control the operation of the FCD-E1L system, using functions identical to those provided by a supervision terminal.

When FCD-E1L includes the optional IP router, it is necessary to use a Telnet host to configure the router parameters and supervise its operation (see Appendix H).

The control subsystem of FCD-E1L systems supports both out-of-band and inband management access.

• For out-of-band management, the connection is made through the front panel serial port, via the SLIP (Serial Link IP) protocol. The routing is performed with a proprietary routing protocol.

• Inband management is performed via the main E1 link. See Appendix B for details.

Page 55: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Working with a Supervisor Terminal 3-5

3.5 Working with a Supervisor Terminal

The supervision terminal provides a simple, command-line based human interface. The terminals can communicate with the managed FCD-E1L systems via the CONTROL DCE serial RS-232 communication port.

The serial port is generally configured as a DCE port, for direct connection to a terminal, but can also be configured as a DTE port when it is necessary to connect the terminal via a modem link, or a low-speed data multiplexer channel. Thus, a remote operator located at a central site can perform all the functions available from a supervision terminal directly connected to the FCD-E1L system. Optional password protection is also available.

The communication data rate of the serial port can be selected in accordance with system requirements (300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200 bps). Automatic data rate identification (Autobaud function) is also available. Data word format is configurable: one start bit, seven or eight data bits, selectable parity (odd, even, or none), and one stop bit.

Since continuous communication with the FCD-E1L system is necessary only when management activities are actually performed, one terminal can manage multiple FCD-E1L units using a polling protocol, with the connection to the individual units being made by means of multi-drop modems or digital sharing devices. For polling purposes, each FCD-E1L can be assigned an eight-bit address, for a maximum of 255 nodes (the zero address is reserved for non-polled communication).

Preliminary Settings for Initial Configuration Session

Configuring the Control Terminal

Before starting an initial configuration session, set the supervisory terminal parameters to match the configuration of the CONTROL DCE port.

To configure the supervision terminal:

1. Select full-duplex mode.

2. Turn the terminal echo off.

3. Disable any type of flow control.

4. Connect the terminal cable to the CONTROL DCE connector of FCD-E1L.

5. Turn the control terminal on.

6. For the initial configuration session, it is recommended to use the default communication parameters: 9600 bps, one start bit, eight data bits, no parity, one stop bit.

Configuring FCD-E1L for the Terminal Management Session

The software necessary to run the FCD-E1L control program is contained in the FCD-E1L system. To initialize FCD-E1L for correct terminal operation, the control port parameters should be set as described in Table 3-2. For a full description of the control port parameters, refer to Appendix D.

Page 56: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 3 Operation Installation and Operation Manual

3-6 Working with a Supervisor Terminal FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Table 3-2. Control Port Parameters for Supervisory Port Management

Parameter Setting for Terminal Management Session Default

Speed The FCD-E1L control port can be configured to communicate at rates of 300,

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200 bps.

AUTO

Data The word format consists of one stop bit and 7 or 8 data bits. 8

Parity Parity can be odd, even or none. NONE

Interface For direct connection, choose DCE.

For connection through a modem or data link, choose DTE.

DCE

You are now ready to start a management session.

Running a Supervisory Terminal Management Session

If the AUTO (Autobaud) mode is enabled, start the control session by pressing <Enter> three times. When FCD-E1L has successfully identified the data rate of the supervision terminal, it notifies you of the results of its power-up self-test:

FCD Self Test in Progress ... OK

or

FCD Self Test in Progress ... Failed

In the latter case, repair or replace FCD-E1L before you can continue using it.

If FCD-E1L successfully passed the power-up self-test, it sends the following message:

FCD Supervisory Port On Line. Type ‘H’ For Help

Starting a Control Session

To start the control session, follow the guidelines below:

• When the node number of FCD-E1L is a number other than zero, you must enter the node number before entering commands. Enter NODE<SP>‘node number’<SP>, where ‘node number’ is the node number in the range from 1 to 255, and <SP> is a space. FCD-E1L echoes the node number, i.e. Node<SP>‘node number’<SP>.

• When password protection is enabled, FCD-E1L displays the PASSWORD> prompt at the beginning of the session. In this case, type the current case-sensitive password (four to eight characters). The default password is RAD. If your password is accepted, the FCD> prompt is displayed.

Entering Commands

This section explains how to enter FCD-E1L commands using a supervisory port. Commands are case-insensitive; you can enter commands in either lowercase or uppercase letters.

Page 57: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Working with a Supervisor Terminal 3-7

To enter commands:

1. Enter commands at the FCD> prompt. This prompt appears at the beginning of each new line. The cursor appears to the right of the prompt.

If the DIP switch is set to DB INIT, then on power-up, the first command you need to enter at the FCD prompt is DEF TERM <type of terminal>.

2. If a node number is required, enter the node number before the command using the following syntax: NODE<SP>‘node number’<SP>‘command’<Enter>.

If the terminal does not echo the NODE command you may have to enter it blind. The typing will echo after the node is identified.

3. FCD-E1L echoes commands as you enter them, character by character.

4. Use <Space> as a separator between command fields and/or parameters.

5. To correct typing errors, press <Backspace> until the error is cleared, then enter the correct characters.

6. To execute a command, press <Enter>; when the command is executed, FCD-E1L displays the current date and time, then displays a new command prompt.

7. After the last page of the data form, press <Enter> to initiate command evaluation.

8. To cancel command execution, press <Ctrl+C>; the FCD> prompt appears, and you can enter a new command.

You can also use <Ctrl+C> to stop the automatic repetition of commands sent with the /R option.

9. You can recall and edit previous commands by pressing <Ctrl+A>. FCD-E1L stores the last 10 commands in a special buffer, and each <Ctrl+A> pressing retrieves the previous command from that buffer. The retrieved command appears on the command line, and can be edited as desired.

10. Press <Ctrl+D> to execute again the last command.

11. If an idle disconnect time-out is specified, FCD-E1L automatically disconnects the ongoing session if no command is received from the terminal for the specified time-out interval.

12. If you enter an invalid command, FCD-E1L does not execute it and displays the following:

If the command is not valid in the current system configuration, or the values you are trying to set are incorrect, FCD-E1L displays an appropriate error message. For a list of configuration error messages, refer to Configuration Error Messages in Chapter 6.

If the command syntax is incorrect, FCD-E1L displays the following message:

Note

Note

Note

Page 58: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 3 Operation Installation and Operation Manual

3-8 Working with a Supervisor Terminal FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Bad command or parameter. Type ‘h’ for help

In this case you must enter the correct command.

13. If the terminal screen fills up during the exchange with the FCD-E1L, it displays the following message:

HIT SPACE–BAR TO CONTINUE

After pressing the spacebar, the terminal scrolls to the next page.

Troubleshooting Command Entry

If FCD-E1L does not respond to any command entered at the terminal, this may be caused by one of the following:

• CONTROL DCE communication parameters are not identical to those of the terminal.

• FCD-E1L is configured to use a protected password.

In the first case, set the DEF PAR section of the S1 DIP switch to ON. This will enforce the default communication parameters, and you will then be able to start the communication session.

If you see the 'PASSWORD>' prompt followed by the asterisks instead of the command you entered, this means that FCD-E1L requires you to enter a password. Press <Enter> and enter the password. If you don’t know the password, set section PASSWORD of the S1 DIP switch to ON, to enforce the default password ‘RAD’, then turn off the unit, turn it on again, type ‘RAD’ and press <Enter>. Now, the FCD-E1L working prompt appears and you can start the session.

Starting a Session with Multiple FCD-E1L Units

When one terminal is used to control several FCD-E1L units connected via modems or a multidrop management cable, node addresses are assigned to each FCD-E1L. The node addresses, in the range of 1 through 255, are assigned during the first session, by means of the command DEF NODE. Use the following procedure to establish a session with a specific FCD-E1L.

If you are using a multidrop configuration, do not assign address 0 to any of the FCD-E1L units connected to this terminal.

1. Press the <Enter> key three times.

2. Type NODE, space, the desired FCD-E1L node address and another space then type the desired command and press <Enter>. For example, with node address 234, type:

NODE<SP>234<SP> ‘command’ <Enter>

3. If the addressed FCD-E1L does not use password protection, it will immediately execute the command.

4. If the addressed FCD-E1L is password protected, you will see the prompt:

PASSWORD>

Note

Page 59: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Working with SNMP Management 3-9

5. Type the case-sensitive password and press <Enter>. You again see:

PASSWORD>

6. Type NODE, space, the desired FCD-E1L node address and another space then type the desired command and press <Enter>. For example, with node address 234, type:

NODE<SP>234<SP> ‘command’ <Enter>

Ending a Control Session

You can end the control session in one of the following three ways:

• Disconnect the cable from the FCD-E1L front-panel CONTROL DCE connector.

• Send the EXIT command from the supervisory terminal (for Telnet sessions, use BYE).

• FCD-E1L automatically disconnects the ongoing session if no commands are received for a certain period of time (controlled by the LOG_OFF parameter). You can, however, disable this timeout. For Telnet sessions, the disconnect interval is determined by the Telnet apathy time.

After the session is ended, it is necessary to enter the correct password again to start a new session (if the password was enabled).

A control session may also be terminated by the FCD-E1L when the terminal DTR line switches to the inactive (OFF) state.

3.6 Working with SNMP Management

The FCD-E1L system includes an SNMP agent that can communicate out-of-band and/or inband through the dedicated management router of the FCD-E1L system. To permit SNMP management, you must configure and enable the SNMP agent. Appendix B provides information on the required parameters.

A basic management topology is shown in Figure 3-2. In this example, a network management station is attached to an Ethernet LAN. A remote access LAN extender, MBE-RAS/A, is located near the managed equipment (e.g., FCD-E1L, MEGAPLEX-2100(*), etc.), and its serial ports are connected via cables to the serial port of the FCD-E1L CONTROL DCE connector using the SLIP protocol.

The MBE-RAS extender can connect up to 8 FCD-E1L devices to one management system.

Note

Page 60: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 3 Operation Installation and Operation Manual

3-10 Working with SNMP Management FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Serial Ports

MBE/RAS/A

LAN

. . . .

To CONTROLConnectors of

Managed Equipment

Figure 3-2. Basic Management Topology Using Network Management Station Attached to LAN

The dedicated management traffic routers of the FCD-E1L systems, and of the other RAD equipment, are able to determine network topology in accordance with the capabilities of the routing algorithm, without requiring the user to provide a priori topology information on the network. Moreover, the routing algorithm also supports automatic switching to an alternate route in case the currently selected route fails. The dedicated router operates on the inband traffic; you can also enable the routing of out-of-band traffic.

Combining Inband and Out-of-Band Management Capabilities

The advanced capabilities of the FCD-E1L SNMP agents allow easy integration of the FCD-E1L system in wide-area managed communication systems. Its capabilities support any practical communication network topology, as illustrated in the example shown in Figure 3-3.

In Figure 3-3, the network management station attached to the FCD-E1L system can manage, using inband communication over the user-selected links, all the units (another FCD-E1L unit, and several Megaplex-2100 units), connected to the remote ends of the corresponding links. Thus, an entire wide-area network can be managed by means of a network management station connected to any FCD-E1L unit (or to any of the other RAD equipment, which supports SNMP management).

Remote Management using Telnet over IP

The FCD-E1L system supports the Telnet communication protocol, which enables any IP host to access the FCD-E1L system supervision facility using TCP/IP communication. The Telnet user has access to the same command-line interface that is available to the user of a supervision terminal, however it uses the management topologies described above for SNMP.

Page 61: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Working with SNMP Management 3-11

RemoteCommunicationNode

DXC-30

DXC-30

To OtherSystems

FCD-E1L

Main Link

MEGAPLEXSystem 5 SP-DTE

SP-DCE

MEGAPLEXSystem 4

SP-DCE

NetworkManagement

Station

FCD-E1L

Figure 3-3. Extended Management Topology Using Network Management Stations

Prevention of Access Conflicts

The FCD-E1L system has a dedicated mechanism that prevents access conflicts when more than one management mode is active.

Table 3-3 lists FCD-E1L response to multiple-access conditions.

Table 3-3. Handling of Management Access Conflicts

Type of First Response to Second Access

Access Telnet Inband

Telnet Out-of-Band

Supervision Terminal

Telnet Inband Message Ignored Message

Telnet

Out-of-Band

Message Ignored Ignored

Supervision

Terminal

Disconnec

ts the

terminal

Not possible Ignored

Page 62: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 3 Operation Installation and Operation Manual

3-12 Working with SNMP Management FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Supervisory Terminal Characteristics

Any standard ASCII terminal (“dumb” terminal or personal computer emulating an ASCII terminal) equipped with a V.24/RS-232 communication interface can be used to control FCD-E1L operation.

Telnet (IP) Host Characteristics

Typically, the Telnet host is a PC with the appropriate suite of TCP/IP protocols, or a UNIX station.

The Telnet host can be directly connected to the managed FCD-E1L unit, or located at any site from which IP communication can be established to the managed FCD-E1L.

Control Port Interface Characteristics

FCD-E1L has a V.24/RS-232 asynchronous DCE port, designated CONTROL DCE and terminated in a 9-pin D-type female connector. The control port continuously monitors the incoming data stream and will immediately respond to any input string received through this port; moreover, when configured to support SLIP, messages in each of the supported protocols are automatically identified and processed.

The supervisory terminal can be connected to the FCD-E1L control port (the CONTROL DCE connector) either directly or through a modem or any other type of full-duplex data link.

• For direct connection to the control port, use a straight-through cable.

• For connection to the control port through a modem or data link, use a cross cable (also called null modem cable).

FCD-E1L can communicate with the supervision terminal or modem at rates of 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200 bps. The word format consists of one start bit, 7 or 8 data bits, and one stop bit.

Parity can be odd, even or disabled. Always make sure the communication interfaces of the terminal/modem and the FCD-E1L are configured for operation with the same parameters.

Modems

The CONTROL DCE port also supports the connection of a remote supervision terminal through a modem link: in this case, configure the port interface as DTE.

For connection to a modem, you need a cross cable (also called null modem cable). Error! Bookmark not defined. in Appendix A presents wiring information for various types of cables.

FCD-E1L supports two types of modems:

• Dial-up Hayes™ compatible modems. FCD-E1L has call-in and call-out capabilities; that is, it can accept external calls and initiate calls in order to report alarms.

• Multidrop modems, such as the RAD SRM-8 miniature multidrop modem.

Page 63: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Working with SNMP Management 3-13

Control Port Handshaking Protocol with Supervision Terminals

The handshaking between the FCD-E1L and the supervision terminal uses the control lines in the CONTROL DCE supervisory port connector. Since the interface mode is selected by software, the direction of the interface signals is the same in both the DCE and DTE mode, and a cross-cable is required for the DTE mode.

The control lines in DCE and DTE modes and the direction of the control signals are detailed in Table 3-4.

Table 3-4. Control Port Handshaking Protocol

Control Line Interface Type

DCE DTE

CTS Out Not Used

DCD Out Out

DSR Out Out

DTR In In

RI Not Used In

RTS In In

Data Terminal Ready (DTR)

The terminal sets the DTR line ON (active) to gain control over FCD-E1L and start a configuration/monitoring session.

When you end the terminal control connection, the DTR line goes OFF (becomes inactive).

Request to Send (RTS)

The RTS line is normally ON (active) when the supervisory terminal is in session.

When the RTS line is OFF (inactive), FCD-E1L interprets any data received from the terminal on the TD line as MARK.

Clear to Send (CTS)

The state of the CTS line is determined by the CTS parameter:

• ON – The CTS line is always ON (active).

• =RTS – The CTS line follows the RTS line.

Ring Indication (RI)

The RI line is used only with dial-up modems (INT=DTE).

The RI line is normally OFF (inactive), and switches to the ON (active) state when the modem attached to the FCD-E1L front-panel CONTROL DCE connector detects an incoming call, refer to Data Set Ready (DSR), below.

Page 64: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 3 Operation Installation and Operation Manual

3-14 FCD-E1L Command Language FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Data Set Ready (DSR)

• Usually, the DSR line is configured to track the DTR line. In this case, if the control port interface is DTE, the DSR line will be set to ON for five seconds when the RI line is ON while the DTR line is OFF.

• If the control port interface is DCE, the DSR line can also be configured to be continuously ON. However, if the DTR line switches to OFF, the DSR line will also switch to OFF for 5 seconds.

In addition, FCD-E1L always sets DSR OFF (inactive) for 5 seconds when the EXIT command is executed or the disconnect time-out expires.

AUTOBAUD Function

When the AUTOBAUD function is enabled, FCD-E1L identifies the operating data of the supervisory terminal by analyzing the timing of three consecutive Enter + Line Feed characters (generated by pressing three times the <Enter> key). The detected data rate is then used for the current communication session.

The automatic baud rate identification procedure is performed (or repeated) whenever three consecutive <Enter>s are received after one of the following events occurs:

• The DTR line has been switched off.

• The EXIT command has been executed.

• The idle disconnect timeout expired because no data has been exchanged with the supervisory terminal.

In case one of these events occurred, FCD-E1L assumes that the current communication session has been terminated.

You must disable the AUTOBAUD function if you intend to use SLIP communication.

3.7 FCD-E1L Command Language

This section presents the FCD-E1L command options and the index of commands.

Command Options

Table 3-5 lists general types of options, which are available with some commands. See details in the explicit command set index, Table 3-6.

Note

Page 65: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 FCD-E1L Command Language 3-15

Table 3-5. Command Options

Option Meaning Example of Usage

/A All CLR ALM /A

Clears all the alarms stored by the alarm buffer

/C Clear DSP BERT /C

Display BERT results and clear the BER counter

/CA Clear all DSP PM /CA

Display the performance monitoring counters, and then clear

(reset to 0) all the counters

/I Start the injection of errors DSP BERT CH 1 /I

/R Repeat automatically

command execution. Available

only when node address is 0;

not available with Telnet

DSP BERT CH 1 /R

Enables you to monitor the updated results of the bit error

rate test being run on the data channel of the FCD-E1L

/S Stop the injection of errors DSP BERT CH 1 /S

Index of Commands

Table 3-6 lists the explicit command set in alphabetical order. For a full description of the FCD-E1L command set, refer to Appendix D.

Table 3-6. FCD-E1L Command Set Index

Command Purpose Options

BYE End current Telnet session

CLR ALM Clear alarms stored in the FCD-E1L alarm buffer /A

CLR LP LOC ANA ML

CLR LP REM ANA ML

CLR LP LOC DIG ML

CLR LP LOC CH 1

CLR LP LOC CH 2

CLR LP REM CH 1

CLR LP REM CH 2

CLR LP BERT CH 1

CLR LP INBAND CH 1

Clear user-initiated test or loopback.

DATE Set the date for the FCD-E1L internal clock

DEF AGENT Define the SNMP agent configuration parameters

DEF ALM MASK Define the alarms to be masked (ignored)

DEF AR Define the alarm reporting method, and the alarm indications, for each

alarm level

DEF BERT CH 1 Define the type of test sequence to be used for BER testing on the

data channel

DEF CALL Define the dial-out parameters for the dial-out port

DEF CH 1, DEF CH 2 Configure the parameters of the data channel

Page 66: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 3 Operation Installation and Operation Manual

3-16 FCD-E1L Command Language FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Command Purpose Options

DEF DNLOAD ML Define the main link inband management parameters

DEF MANAGER LIST Define or modify the network management stations to which the

SNMP agent of this FCD-E1L system will send traps

DEF ML Configure main link parameters

DEF NAME Define the logical name of the FCD-E1L

DEF PROMPT Define the supervisory port prompt

DEF NODE Define the node number of the FCD-E1L

DEF PWD Define a new password

DEF ROUTE Define the network management stations to be statistically routed via

the supervisory port

DEF SP Configure supervisory port parameters

DEF SYS Configure system parameters

DEF TERM Reset the terminal control codes to 0

DEF TERM VT100

DEF TERM TV920

DEF TERM VT52

DEF TERM FREEDOM100

DEF TERM FREEDOM220

Select the control codes for one of the standard terminal types

DSP AGENT Display the SNMP agent parameters

DSP ALM Display the contents of the alarm buffer and optionally clear the buffer /CA

DSP BERT CH 1 Display the results of the last BER measurement made on the data

channel

/I /R

/S /C

DSP HDR TST Displays hardware test results

DSP MANAGER LIST Display the network management stations to which the SNMP agent of

this FCD-E1L system sends traps

DSP PM ML Display the contents of the main link performance monitoring

registers, and optionally clear these registers

/C

/CA

DSP REM AGENT Display information on the remote SNMP agents handled by the

FCD-E1L IP router

DSP ST CH 1,

DSP ST CH 2

Display status information on the data channel

DSP ST ML Display status information on the main link /C

DSP ST SYS Display system status

DSP TS Display information on the use and type of main link timeslots

EXIT End the current control session

F Define control codes for the supervision terminal

HELP Displays a concise index of commands and option switches

INIT DB Load the default configuration instead of the user’s configuration

LEARN Perform automatic configuration of the E1 parameters

Page 67: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Turning FCD-E1L Off 3-17

Command Purpose Options

LP LOC ANA ML

LP REM ANA ML

LP LOC DIG ML

LP LOC CH 1

LP LOC CH 2

LP REM CH 1

LP REM CH 2

LP BERT CH 1

LP INBAND CH 1

Activate a user-controlled test or loopback.

RESET Reset the FCD-E1L

TIME Set the time of the FCD-E1L internal clock

3.8 Turning FCD-E1L Off

To turn FCD-E1L off:

Disconnect the FCD-E1L from the power.

Page 68: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 3 Operation Installation and Operation Manual

3-18 Turning FCD-E1L Off FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Page 69: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Configuring the Local FCD-E1L 4-1

Chapter 4

Configuration

4.1 Configuration Sequence

• Configure the local FCD-E1L

• Configure the remote FCD-E1L

4.2 Configuring the Local FCD-E1L

FCD-E1L can work opposite any standard vendor’s equipment providing E1 or fractional E1 services. This section details procedures for configuring FCD-E1L for a sample application (see Figure 4-1), in which two FCD-E1L units with single data channel are connected via the E1 network. The data rate is 128 kbps, and no management is required.

Figure 4-1. Two FCD-E1Ls Working via E1 Network

In this application, the local FCD-E1L unit has to be configured by a regular configuration procedure. Since no management is involved, you can configure the remote unit by using the E1 learning (autoconfiguration) feature, either via supervision terminal or the front-panel button.

To configure the local FCD-E1L from the terminal:

1. Type INIT DB to reset the database to the default parameters.

2. Type DEF TERM VT-100 to define the terminal control codes.

3. Type DEF ML to define the main link parameters: the E1 link interface operating mode (SHORT or LONG), the framing mode (G.732S, G732N or unframed), use of the CRC-4 (YES or NO), and set the idle code. The display after configuration look as follows:

Page 70: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 4 Configuration Installation and Operation Manual

4-2 Configuring the Local FCD-E1L FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

FRAME CRC-4 SYNC RX_GAIN IDLE_TS_CODE

G732S YES CCITT SHORT 00

4. Type DEF CH 1 to define the data channel characteristics.

The following line is displayed:

SPEED FIFO_SIZE CLOCK MODE CTS CLOCK_POLARITY

64 KBPS AUTO DCE ON NORMAL

5. Change the SPEED to 128 KBPS and then press <Enter> to display the next line. The following line is displayed:

MAP_MODE START_TS TS_TYPE

USER N/A N/A

6. Press <Enter> to obtain the first line of the data channel timeslot map:

TS : NO 1 NO 2 NO 3 NO 4 NO 5 NO 6 NO 7

TYPE : NC NC NC NC NC NC NC

For the first two timeslots, select DATA by pressing <F> or <B>. The display looks as follows:

TS : NO 1 NO 2 NO 3 NO 4 NO 5 NO 6 NO 7

TYPE : DATA DATA NC NC NC NC NC

7. Press <Enter> five times to see all the timeslots and end the command.

8. If you are using Telnet, you have to indicate your IP address. To define the SNMP agent parameters, type:

DEF AGENT<Enter>

You will see the current agent parameters:

OLD AGENT PARAMETERS

IP_ADDRESS IS : = 0.0.0.0

READ COMMUNITY IS : = public

WRITE COMMUNITY IS : = private

TRAP COMMUNITY IS : = public

TELNET_APATHY_TIME

10 MIN

Page 71: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Configuration

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Configuring the Remote FCD-E1L 4-3

9. Type in your IP address and press <Enter> five times to end the command.

A typical display is shown below:

CURRENT AGENT PARAMETERS

IP_ADDRESS IS : = 172.17.191.81

READ COMMUNITY IS : = public

WRITE COMMUNITY IS : = private

TRAP COMMUNITY IS : = public

10. To display the timeslot information, type:

DSP TS<Enter>

The display is shown below:

TS : 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

TYPE : DATA DATA NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC

DEST : CH1 CH1 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

TS : 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

TYPE : NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC

DEST : NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

TS : 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

TYPE : NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC

DEST : NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

4.3 Configuring the Remote FCD-E1L

When the E1 learning process is activated, FCD-E1L successively configures the E1 link interface operating mode (SHORT), the framing mode (G.732S) and the CRC (ON), and then checks and displays the data carrying timeslots.

Any time FCD-E1L detects a sync or signal loss on the E1 link, the process is interrupted and FCD-E1L announces that the process has failed.

The learning process cannot be activated when inband management is activated.

The E1 learning process can be activated via a terminal command or via the AUTO CONFIGURATION button on the FCD-E1L front panel.

Note

Page 72: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 4 Configuration Installation and Operation Manual

4-4 Configuring the Remote FCD-E1L FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

To configure the remote FCD-E1L from the terminal:

1. Type DEF TERM VT-100 and press <Enter> to define the terminal control codes.

2. Type DEF ML and press <Enter> . Configure the idle code value to match that of the local FCD-E1L.

3. To activate the E1 learning process, type:

LEARN<Enter>

For a few seconds, the terminal displays the following message:

LEARNING E1 PARAMETERS, PLEASE WAIT…

Once FCD-E1L has detected the framing and CRC-4 mode of the E1 link, it displays the results in the following form:

FRAME = G732S, CRC4 = ON

FCD-E1L then detects the data carrying timeslots and displays:

DATA TIME SLOTS: 01, 02

Finally FCD-E1L displays the following screen:

E1 LEARNING FINISHED SUCCESSFULLY

In parallel, the state of the learning process is indicated by the AUTO CONFIGURATION LED on the front panel.

To configure the remote FCD-E1L E1 learning from the front panel:

1. Open the small lid on the bottom of FCD-E1L to gain access to the DIP switch S2. Set the idle code to match the value set on the local FCD-E1L. The binary value corresponding to FF in hexadecimal notation is 1111 1111. Close the lid.

2. Press the AUTO CONFIGURATION button for 2 seconds.

The AUTO CONFIGURATION LED monitors the E1 learning process through its five states described in Table 4-1.

Note

Page 73: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Configuration

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Configuring the Remote FCD-E1L 4-5

Table 4-1. AUTO CONFIGURATION LED States

State Indicates that…

OFF Learning process has not started yet and there is no sync loss

on the E1 link

Blinking green Learning is in progress

Permanent green

(for 10 sec)

Learning process has succeeded

Permanent red

(for 10 sec)

You try to activate E1 learning, while learning is disabled or

inband management is active

Blinking red

(for 10 sec)

Learning has failed

Page 74: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 4 Configuration Installation and Operation Manual

4-6 Configuring the Remote FCD-E1L FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Page 75: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Overview 5-1

Chapter 5

Configuring a Typical Application

This chapter provides detailed instructions for setting up a typical application using one DXC-10A and one FCD-E1L.

5.1 Overview

Application – Extended LAN Connection

This application creates an extended LAN connection to enable an out-of-band management connection to DXC-10A.

The FCD-E1L IR-ETH/QN interface module includes a high performance self-learning Fast Ethernet bridge that connects to the LAN via a single 10BaseT or 100BaseT port, operating in full- or half-duplex. The IR-ETH/QN interface module also supports IEEE 802.1/P frames and IEEE 802.1/Q frames, enabling VLAN applications.

The module automatically learns MAC addresses of the LAN to which it is connected. Its LAN table stores up to 1,024 addresses with 5-minute automatic aging.

The WAN port in a DXC with the DHS module is a virtual n × 64 port, which is connected to the physical interface via the DXC matrix.

Figure 5-1. Extended LAN Connection

Page 76: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 5 Configuring a Typical Application Installation and Operation Manual

5-2 Configuring DXC-10A FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

5.2 Configuring DXC-10A

DXC10A>def port 2 1 MULT SPEED FIFO_SIZE CLK_MODE CTS 64 1x64 = 64 AUTO DCE ON INB_MNG ROUTE_PROT NONE NONE MAP_MODE START_DEST_TS DEST_PORT USER 01 01:02 TS : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CONNECT : YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO TS : 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 CONNECT : NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO TS : 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 CONNECT : NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO TS : 31 CONNECT : NO

LED Indicators

The table below lists the IR-ETH/QN rear-panel LED indicators and describes their functions.

LED Color Description Location

LINK Green ON – LAN link is ON Connector

ACT Yellow ON or blinking – LAN is receiving data Connector

100M Green ON – LAN is operating at 100 Mbps

OFF – LAN is operating at 10 Mbps

Panel

DXC10A>UPD DB

To verify the connection use the command DSP CON 1 2.

In order to mange the DXC remotely we will need to assign the DXC an IP address.

Page 77: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Configuring a Typical Application

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Configuring DXC-10A 5-3

DXC10A>def agent OLD AGENT PARAMETERS -------------------- IP ADDRESS IS : = 1.1.1.1 SUBNET MASK IS : = 255.255.255.000 DEFAULT GATEWAY IS : = 1.1.1.1 READ COMMUNITY IS : = public WRITE COMMUNITY IS : = private TRAP COMMUNITY IS : = public TELNET_APATHY_TIME 10 MIN IP ADDRESS 999.999.999.999 172.17.191.81 SUBNET MASK 999.999.999.999 255.255.255.0 DEFAULT GATEWAY 999.999.999.999 1.1.1.1 SNMP READ COMMUNITY SNMP WRITE COMMUNITY SNMP TRAP COMMUNITY CURRENT AGENT PARAMETERS ------------------------ IP ADDRESS IS : = 172.017.191.081 SUBNET MASK IS : = 255.255.255.000 DEFAULT GATEWAY IS : = 001.001.001.001 READ COMMUNITY IS : = public WRITE COMMUNITY IS : = private TRAP COMMUNITY IS : = public Data Base Configuration was changed, enter UPD DB to activate.

In order to save the configuration use the UPD DB command.

DXC10A>UPD DB

In order to activate the new IP, we need to reset the DXC .

Please use the command reset to enforce reset.

DXC10A>reset WARNING !!! ----------- You are going to Reset DXC10A. Are you sure (Y/N) ? Y

Page 78: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 5 Configuring a Typical Application Installation and Operation Manual

5-4 Configuring FCD-E1L FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

5.3 Configuring FCD-E1L

System Configuration

1. Connect the ASCII terminal to FCD-E1L and type: <def term vt100>

2. Type, Time and fill in the current parameters.

3. Type, Date and fill in the current parameters.

FCD>DEF SYS CLK_MASTER CLK_FBACK DATE_FORMAT LEARNING_MODE ML NONE YYYY-MM-DD ENABLE

FCD>DEF ML FRAME CRC-4 SYNC RX_GAIN IDLE_TS_CODE G732N NO CCITT SHORT 00

FCD>DEF CH 1 SPEED FIFO_SIZE CLOCK_MODE CTS CLOCK_POLARITY 64 KBPS AUTO DCE N/A NORMAL MAP_MODE START_TS TS_TYPE USER N/A N/A TS : NO 1 NO 2 NO 3 NO 4 NO 5 NO 6 NO 7 DATA NC NC NC NC NC NC TS : NO 8 NO 9 NO 10 NO 11 NO 12 NO 13 NO 14 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC TS : NO 15 NO 16 NO 17 NO 18 NO 19 NO 20 NO 21 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC TS : NO 22 NO 23 NO 24 NO 25 NO 26 NO 27 NO 28 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC TS : NO 29 NO 30 NO 31 NC NC NC

Page 79: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Monitoring Performance 6-1

Chapter 6

Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

This chapter describes the FCD-E1L diagnostic functions, which include:

• Monitoring performance

• Detecting errors

• Troubleshooting

6.1 Monitoring Performance

The performance evaluation and monitoring functions provided by the FCD-E1L for the main link are an important tool for testing and troubleshooting the communication link.

This section describes the performance evaluation and monitoring functions.

When the CRC-4 option is enabled, it is possible to monitor end-to-end the data transmission performance. The error detection information is derived from the data payload, by performing a cyclic redundancy check (CRC). The resulting CRC checksum is transmitted in addition to the raw data bits. The receiving end recalculates the checksum and compares the results with the received checksum: any difference between the two checksums indicates that one or more bit errors are contained in the current data block being evaluated.

When the CRC-4 option is disabled, most of parameters available with the CRC-4 option enabled are available as well, but some of them are calculated in a different way.

The performance data can be displayed on the supervision terminal by means of the DSP PM ML command, as explained in Appendix D. Performance monitoring parameters are shown in Table 6-1.

By adding the /CA switch to the command, you can reset all the performance diagnostics registers.

Page 80: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

6-2 Monitoring Performance FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Table 6-1. Performance Monitoring Parameters

Display Name Description

CURRENT ES Current errored

seconds

CRC-4 enabled: An errored second is any second containing

one or more CRC error events, or one or more OOF events, or

one or more AIS events, or one or more controlled slip events.

CRC-4 disabled: An errored second is any second containing

one or more BPV events, or one or more OOF events, or one

or more AIS events, or one or more controlled slip events.

In both cases, the data is collected for the current 15-minute

interval.

CURRENT UAS Current

unavailable

seconds

An unavailable second is any second in which a failed signal

state exists. A failed signal state is declared when

10 consecutive severely errored seconds (SES) occur, and is

cleared after 10 consecutive seconds of data are processed

without a SES.

CURRENT SES Current severely

errored seconds

CRC-4 enabled: A SES is a second with 832 or more CRC error

events, or one or more OOF events.

CRC-4 disabled: A SES is a second with 2048 or more BPV

events.

In both cases, the data is collected for the current 15-minute

interval.

CURRENT BES Current bursty

errored seconds

CRC-4 enabled: A BES is a second with 2 to 319 CRC error

events and no AIS events. The data is collected for the

current 15-minute interval.

CRC-4 disabled: not relevant.

CURRENT LOFC Current loss of

frame counter

The loss of frame (LOF) counter counts the loss of frame

alignment events. The data is collected for the current

15-minute interval.

CURRENT LES Current line

errored seconds

A line errored second is a second in which one or more Line

Code Violation events were detected. The data is collected for

the current 15-minute interval.

CURRENT SEFS Current severely

errored framing

seconds

A severely errored framing second is a second with 320 or

more OOF events or one or more AIS event. The data is

collected for the current 15-minute interval.

CURRENT DM Current degraded

minutes

The total number of degraded minutes in the current 15-

minute interval. A degraded minute is a minute in which the

BPV events rate ranges between 1×10-3 and 1×10-6. This

number is updated every minute.

CURRENT CSS Current slip

second counter

A CSS is a second with one or more controlled slip events. The

data is collected for the current 15-minute interval.

CURRENT TIMER Seconds elapsed from the start of interval counting.

24 HOUR ES Long-term errored

seconds

The total number of ES in the current 24-hour interval.

Page 81: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Monitoring Performance 6-3

Display Name Description

24 HOUR UAS Long-term fail

seconds

The total number of UAS in the current 24-hour interval.

24 HOUR SES Long-term

severely errored

seconds

The total number of SES in the current 24-hour interval.

24 HOUR BES Long-term bursty

errored seconds

The total number of BES in the current 24-hour interval.

24 HOUR LES Long-term line

errored seconds

The total number of LES in the current 24-hour interval.

24 HOUR SEFS Long-term

severely errored

framing seconds

The total number of SEFS in the current 24-hour interval.

24 HOUR LOFC Long-term loss of

frame counter

The total number of LOF events in the current 24-hour

interval.

24 HOUR LES Long-term line

errored seconds

The total number of LES in the current 24-hour interval.

24 HOUR SEFS Long-term

severely errored

framing seconds

The total number of SEFS in the current 24-hour interval.

24 HOUR LOFC Long-term loss of

frame counter

The total number of LOF events in the current 24-hour

interval.

24 HOUR CSS Long-term slip

second counter

The total number of CSS in the current 24-hour interval.

24 DEGRADE MIN Long-term

degraded minutes

The total number of degraded minutes in the last 24-hour

interval. This number is updated every minute.

LAST 24 DEGRADE MIN Last degraded

minutes

The total number of degraded minutes in the previous 24-

hour interval. This number is updated every 24 hours.

24 INTERVAL Long-term interval The number of valid 15-minute intervals in the previous

24-hour period.

BPV LAST MINUTE The number of BPV events detected in the last minute.

BPV WORST MINUTE The number of BPV events detected during the worst minute

since the last time the counters were cleared.

Page 82: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

6-4 Handling Alarms FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

6.2 Detecting Errors

During power-up, FCD-E1L automatically performs a power-on self-test, to test critical circuit functions. LEDs light in a predefined order and then turn off.

• If a problem is detected during self-test, FCD-E1L automatically sends reports to the supervision terminal.

• If the self-test is successfully completed, FCD-E1L starts normal operation, and its front-panel indicators display the link status, as explained in Controls and Indicators in Chapter 1.

6.3 Handling Alarms

Alarm Display

FCD-E1L maintains an alarm buffer that can store up to 100 alarm messages.

FCD-E1L displays alarm messages on the supervision terminal. Alarms can be of two types, designated as ON/OFF and ON:

• An ON/OFF-type alarm is displayed only when the alarm condition is present, and is automatically removed when the condition is cleared (if the alarm is being displayed, it will disappear only when the display is refreshed by scrolling).

• An ON-type alarm persists even after the event that caused the alarm condition is cleared.

This manual uses the term ON-state alarm. An ON-state alarm is either an ON-type alarm or an ON/OFF-type alarm when its alarm condition is still present.

When an ON/OFF-type alarm changes its state from ON to OFF, it is not removed from the alarm buffer. Moreover, a new entry of this alarm is added to the alarm buffer. This feature enables you to view the alarm history on the terminal using the DSP ALM command. A typical display looks like this:

ALARM 21 SIGNAL LOSS ON 01:42:11 2001-01-01

ALARM 25 LOCAL SYNC LOSS ON 01:45:14 2001-01-01

Table 6-2 presents in alphabetical order the alarm messages displayed on the FCD-E1L control terminal, and lists the actions required to correct the alarm condition.

Page 83: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Handling Alarms 6-5

Working with Alarm Buffer

You can display the active alarms from the supervisory terminal.

To display the active alarms:

Type DSP ALM.

The terminal displays up to 100 alarms stored in the buffer, listing for each alarm its number, alarm itself, its state (ON or OFF) the time and the date when the last change in its state occurred.

To clear the alarm buffer:

Type CLR ALM/A or DSP ALM/CA.

For more details, see description of the corresponding command in Appendix D.

Page 84: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

6-6 Handling Alarms FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Table 6-2. FCD-E1L Alarm Messages

Terminal Message Alarm Number

Description Corrective Actions Severity Type

AIS OCCURED 23 AIS is being detected on the link Problem at the equipment connected to the remote

end of the link

MAJOR ON/OFF

AIS SYNC LOSS 24 Local loss of frame synchronization

alarm on the main link, caused by AIS

condition

Problem at the equipment connected to the remote

end of the link

MAJOR ON/OFF

ALARM BUFFER OVERFLOW

04 More than 100 alarms entries have

been written in the alarm buffer since

the last clear command

Read the messages, and then send the CLR ALM /A

(CA) command from the supervision terminal

MINOR ON

BPV ERROR 30 Bipolar violations in the main link

receive signal. Updated once per

second

Have the main link checked. Perform the power-up

self-test and replace the FCD-E1L if a failure is

detected

MINOR ON

BRG FAILURE 33 FCD-E1L technical failure (baud rate

generator of the corresponding data

channel failed)

Replace the FCD-E1L MAJOR ON/OFF

CLOCK WAS CHANGED TO FALLBACK

07 The FCD-E1L switched to the fallback

clock source, because the master clock

source failed

Check the master clock source. A clock source is

replaced as a result of failure under the following

conditions:

1. ML – fails during local loss of frame

synchronization on the main link

2. CH1 or CH2 – fails when the data channel

equipment is disconnected or inoperative (DTR line

not asserted)

MINOR ON

CLOCK WAS CHANGED TO INTERNAL

08 The FCD-E1L switched to the internal

clock source, because both the master

and the fallback clock sources failed

1. Check the two clock sources.

2. Perform the power-up self-test and replace the

FCD-E1L if a failure is detected

MINOR ON

Page 85: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Handling Alarms 6-7

Terminal Message Alarm Number

Description Corrective Actions Severity Type

CLOCK WAS CHANGED TO MASTER

09 The FCD-E1L switched back to the

clock source selected as the master

source

Normal state – no action required MINOR ON

CRC-4 ERROR

32

CRC-4 errors detected in the main link

receive signal. Updated once per

second

1. Have the link checked.

2. Perform the power-up self-test and replace the

FCD-E1L if a failure is detected

MINOR ON

CRC MF ALARM 60 Local loss of synchronization to the

CRC-4 multiframe on the main link

(only on E1 port operating with CRC-4

enabled)

1. Check cable connections to the port connector.

2. Check line and/or other communication equipment

providing the link to the remote unit.

3. Replace the FCD-E1L unit.

MINOR ON

DATABASE CHECKSUM ERROR

11 FCD-E1L technical failure (the

database currently stored in the non-

volatile memory of FCD-E1L is

corrupted)

1. Use the supervision terminal to enter the INIT DB

command.

2. Turn the FCD-E1L off for a few minutes, and then

turn it back on and read the alarm messages

generated during the power-up self-test. Replace

the FCD-E1L if a failure is detected

MAJOR ON/OFF

DB-INIT SWITCH IS ON

06 Section 2, DB-INIT, of DIP switch S1 is

set to ON (the changes made to the

database will be lost if the unit is

turned off or reset).

1. Remove FCD-E1L cover.

2. Set section 2 on DIP switch S1 to OFF.

MINOR ON

DIAL-OUT ALTERNATE CALL FAILED

16 The call attempts to the alternate

dial-out number failed

If the number is not busy, check the modem connected

to the CONTROL DCE connector. If the called number is

often busy, you may also increase the number of call

retries

MAJOR ON

DIAL-OUT CYCLE FAILED

10 The current cycle of call attempts

failed

Check the modem connected to the CONTROL DCE

connector. If the called numbers are often busy, you

may also increase the number of call retries

MAJOR ON

Page 86: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

6-8 Handling Alarms FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Terminal Message Alarm Number

Description Corrective Actions Severity Type

DIAL-OUT PRIMARY CALL FAILED

15 The call attempts to the primary dial-

out number failed

If the number is not busy, check the modem connected

to the CONTROL DCE connector. If the called number is

often busy, you may also increase the number of call

retries

MAJOR ON

DUPLICATE NAME IN THE NETWORK

38 Another node in the network uses the

FCD-E1L logical name. This prevents

SNMP management

Check and change as required MAJOR ON/OFF

EXCESSIVE BPV 22 The rate of bipolar violations in the

main link receive signal exceeds

1 × 10-6 during a measurement interval

of 1000 seconds

1. Problem in the network facilities used by the main

link.

2. Turn the FCD-E1L off for a few minutes, and then

turn it back on and read the alarm messages

generated during the power-up self-test. Replace

the FCD-E1L if a failure is detected

MAJOR ON/OFF

EXECIVE ERR RATIO 31 The bit error rate of the link receive

signal exceeds 1 × 10-3

1. Problem in the network facilities used by the main

link.

2. Turn the FCD-E1L off for a few minutes, and then

turn it back on and read the alarm messages

generated during the power-up self-test. Replace

the FCD-E1L if a failure is detected

MAJOR ON/OFF

FRAME SLIP 29 Frame slips are detected on the main

link. Updated once per second.

Note:This alarm message is not

displayed during local loss of frame

synchronization.

1. Incorrect selection of master clock source

2. Problem at far end (unstable clock source)

3. Replace the FCD-E1L only if steps 1 and 2 do not

correct the problem.

MAJOR ON

HARDWARE FAILURE 05 Technical failure in one of the internal

programmable components

Replace the FCD-E1L MAJOR ON/OFF

LINK INTEGRITY ERROR

42 The Ethernet interface is not

connected to an operating LAN

Check the cable connecting the LAN, the LAN media,

and check that at least one station is active on the

LAN

MAJOR ON/OFF

Page 87: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Handling Alarms 6-9

Terminal Message Alarm Number

Description Corrective Actions Severity Type

LOCAL MF ALARM 26 Local loss of multiframe

synchronization alarm on the main link

1. Check that the correct framing mode is used at

the local and remote ends.

2. Perform the corrective actions listed for LOCAL

SYNC LOSS.

MAJOR ON/OFF

LOCAL SYNC LOSS 25 Local loss of frame synchronization

alarm on the main link

1. Check cable connections to the link connector.

2. Check line and/or other communication equipment

providing the link to the remote FCD-E1L

3. Replace the FCD-E1L

MAJOR ON/OFF

LOOP INBAND ON 35 An inband activated loopback is now

connected on the data channel

If the loopback is no longer needed, disconnect it MAJOR ON

MANAGEMENT PORT IS DOWN

37 The FCD-E1L cannot communicate with

the network management station. This

may indicate incorrect setup of the

management port parameters, a

problem on the communication path,

or a hardware failure

1. Correct the parameters.

2. Check for disconnection.

3. Check for hardware failure.

4. Check the management communication path

MAJOR ON/OFF

MANAGEMENT PORT IS LOOPED

36 The management port receives its own

messages (this could be caused by a

test loopback on the communication

path used for SNMP management or on

the management port). Management is

not possible while this condition is

present

Find the location of the loopback and request

disconnection

MAJOR ON/OFF

PSWRD SWITCH IS ON 12 Section PASSWORD of switch S1 is set

to ON

If it is no longer necessary to enforce the default

password and node number, return the switch to OFF

MINOR ON

REAL TIME CLOCK BATTERY FAILURE

01 The internal battery that powers the

FCD-E1L internal real-time clock while

the FCD-E1L is not powered has failed.

Have the FCD-E1L repaired. MAJOR ON

Page 88: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

6-10 Handling Alarms FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Terminal Message Alarm Number

Description Corrective Actions Severity Type

REMOTE MF ALARM 27 Remote loss of multiframe

synchronization alarm on the main

link.

Problem at the remote equipment. MAJOR ON/OFF

REMOTE SYNC LOSS 28 Remote loss of frame synchronization

alarm on the main link.

Problem at the remote equipment. Perform the

following checks on the remote equipment:

1. Check cable connections to the link connector.

2. Check line and/or other communication equipment

providing the link to the remote equipment.

3. Replace the equipment.

MAJOR ON/OFF

RTS/CONTROL IS OFF 43 Indicates that the RTS signal on the

DTE unit is off.

Set the RTS signal on the DTE unit to ON state. MAJOR ON/OFF

SELF TEST ERROR 17 A problem has been detected during

FCD-E1L self-test.

Replace the FCD-E1L. MAJOR ON/OFF

SFIFO SLIP 34 Technical problem (FIFO

overflow/underflow), usually caused by

differences in clock rates.

1. Check the clock mode of the corresponding data

channel.

2. Turn the FCD-E1L off for a few minutes, and then

turn it back on and read the alarm messages

generated during the power-up self-test. Replace

the FCD-E1L if a failure is detected.

MAJOR ON

SIGNAL LOSS 21 Loss of main link port receive signal. 1. Check cable connections to the link connector.

2. Check line and/or other communication equipment

providing the link to the remote unit.

3. Perform the power-up self-test and replace the

FCD-E1L if a failure is detected.

MAJOR ON/OFF

SP-PAR SWITCH IS ON

13 Section DEF PAR of DIP switch S1 is set

to ON

If this setting is no longer required, return the switch

section to OFF.

MINOR ON

Page 89: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Handling Alarms 6-11

Configuration Error Messages

If FCD-E1L detects a configuration mismatch, it displays an appropriate configuration error message on the supervision terminal.

The configuration error messages have the format ERROR, followed by a numeric code and a short description of the error message after the error code. Table 6-3 lists the configuration error messages in order of their codes and explains each of them.

Table 6-3. FCD-E1L Configuration Error Messages

Error Code Terminal Message and Description

ERROR 000 MASTER AND FALLBACK CLOCK ARE THE SAME

You are trying to select the same source as both master and fallback clock source. Check

and change as required.

ERROR 001 INVALID MASTER CLOCK SOURCE

The channel you are trying to select as the master clock source is either not connected,

or its clock mode is not DTE2.

Check and change as required.

ERROR 002 INVALID FALLBACK CLOCK SOURCE

The channel you are trying to select as the fallback clock source is either not connected,

or its clock mode is not DTE2

Check and change as required.

ERROR 003 ILLEGAL DCD DELAY AND INTERFACE COMBINATION

You are trying to select a non-zero DCD DELAY after the FCD-E1L supervisory port

interface has been set as DCE.

ERROR 004 CONFLICT IN INTERFACE AND DSR PARAMETERS

You selected DSR=ON after the supervisory port interface has been set to DTE. The

DSR=ON selection is valid only for DCE interface.

ERROR 005 TIMESLOT 16 OF E1-G732S FRAME IS MAPPED

You are trying to select the G732S framing mode while timeslot 16 is assigned to one of

the data channels or dedicated to inband management. Free timeslot 16 before selecting

the G732S framing.

ERROR 006 CHANNEL SPEED NOT MATCH OPEN NUMBER OF TS

The number of timeslots currently allocated to the data channel is not equal to the

number of timeslots required to support the nominal data rate configured. Either

increase the number of timeslots, or reduce the channel data rate.

ERROR 007 FCD IN LOOP CAN’T UPDATE HARDWARE

When a test or loopback is active, it is not possible to change the FCD-E1L operating

mode in accordance with the updated configuration parameters. You may see this

message either after pressing ENTER, or after a update data base command has been

received through the supervisory port (or inband management). You must first

deactivate the test or loopback.

Page 90: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

6-12 Handling Alarms FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Error Code Terminal Message and Description

ERROR 008 CONFLICT BETWEEN CLOCK MODE AND FIFO SIZE

You are trying to select the DCE or DTE1 clock mode when the FIFO size is not AUTO. A

specific FIFO size can be selected only for the DTE2 mode. Select AUTO.

ERROR 009 IILEGAL TIME SLOT ALLOCATION

At least one of the main link timeslots is assigned to more than one data channel. Check

the timeslot assignment for each channel, with particular attention to automatic

assignment (SEQ mode).

ERROR 010 TIME-SLOT OUT OF RANGE

When using the SEQ or ALT mapping mode, the sum of the number of timeslots

requested for the data channel and the number of starting timeslot exceeds 31. Check

and change as required.

ERROR 011 ILLEGAL UNFRAMED CONFIGURATION

You cannot configure the unframed mode in the following cases: either there are main

link timeslots connected to ports, or CH 2 is of the RS-232 type.

ERROR 012 ILLEGAL SPEED FOR AUXILIARY DEVICE

The AUTO (Autobaud) mode cannot be selected when the supervisory port is to support

the SLIP protocol (AUX DEV parameter is set to SLIP-NMS).

ERROR 013 WRONG IP ADDRESS

The syntax of the IP address is incorrect. The IP address must be entered in the

dotted-quad format (four numbers in the range of 0 through 255, separated by periods).

ERROR 015 TWO OR MORE MANAGERS WITH SAME IP ADDRESS

Check that each network management station has a different IP address.

ERROR 016 DEDICATE TIME-SLOT IS MAPPED

The timeslot you are trying to select for use as the dedicated inband management

timeslot on the main link is already assigned. Check and change as required.

ERROR 017 ILLEGAL DOWNLOAD CONFIGURATION

You are trying to enable downloading while using the UNFRAME mode When using the

UNFRAME mode, you must disable downloading.

WARNING 018 CONFLICT BETWEEN SYSTEM CLK AND CHANNEL CLK

A data channel is configured to use the clock mode DTE2, but the master clock source is

not configured to use that channel. Check and change as required.

ERROR 019 DEDICATE TIME-SLOT IS NOT MAPPED

The protocol selected for inband management requires the use of dedicated timeslot,

but no timeslot has been assigned to management on the main link.

ERROR 020 LEARNING IN PROGRESS, UPDATE DB IS ILLEGAL

You are trying to activate the UPDATE DB command while E1 learning process is in

progress.

ERROR 021 FIFO SIZE TOO SMALL

When selecting the FIFO size manually, you can select only a size which exceeds the

default FIFO size for the corresponding rate. Increase the FIFO size.

Page 91: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Handling Alarms 6-13

Error Code Terminal Message and Description

ERROR 022 PORT TYPE AND DTE2 CONFLICT

DTE2 clock mode can't be selected for a RS-232 or X.21 channel.

ERROR 023 CHANNEL SPEED EXCEEDS INTERFACE LIMIT

The RS-232 interface speed can't exceed 128 kbps (a maximum of two timeslots can be

opened).

ERROR 051 ILLEGAL PORT LOOP COMBINATION

You are trying to activate an illegal loopback combination (see Allowed Loop Combinations on page 6-20). First deactivate the loopback that is currently active.

ERROR 052 LOOP IS NOT ACTIVE

You are trying to deactivate a loopback or test that is not active. Check and change as

required.

ERROR 053 CURRENT LOOP ALREADY BEING PERFORMED

You are trying to activate a loopback that is already active. Check and change as

required.

ERROR 054 ILLEGAL PARAMETER FOR CURENT CONFIGURATION

You are trying to configure a parameter which is not supported by this FCD-E1L version.

ERROR 055 LOOP NOT SUPPORTED ON CURRENT FCD TYPE

You are trying to activate a loop that is not supported by the FCD-E1L.

ERROR 056 ILLEGAL COMMAND FOR CURRENT PORT MODE

You are trying to activate a command that cannot be activated due to current port

mode. Check and change as required.

ERROR 057 REPETITIVE MODE CAN'T BE PERFORMED THROUGH TELNET

You are trying to use a command with /R option while using Telnet for management. This

is not allowed.

ERROR 058 CANT PERFORM LOOP - CHANNEL NOT CONNECTED

You are trying to activate a loopback on the data channel while it is not connected.

ERROR 059 ILLEGAL FIELD VALUE

The value entered in the specified field is not allowed. Check and correct as required.

WARNING 060 NEW ROUTE ADDRESS WILL BE ACTIVE ONLY AFTER RESET

After changing the agent route address, you should reset the unit in order for the system

to store the change.

ERROR 062 CAN'T LEARN WHILE INBAND MANAGEMENT IS ENABLED

You are trying to activate E1 learning, while inband management is active. Use DEF

DNLOAD command to disable inband management.

ERROR 063 NEW DOWNLOAD MODE WILL BE ACTIVE ONLY AFTER RESET

To bring into effect the change of the downloading parameter, you have to restart

FCD-E1L.

ERROR 064 E1 LEARNING IS DISABLED (USE DEF SYS TO ENABLE)

You are trying to activate E1 learning, while it is disabled. Use DEF SYS command to

enable E1 learning.

Page 92: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

6-14 Troubleshooting FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

6.4 Troubleshooting

If a problem occurs, check the displayed alarm messages as described in Table 6-2. If the problem cannot be corrected by performing the actions listed in Table 6-2, use Table 6-4 to identify the trouble symptoms. Perform the actions listed under Corrective Measures in the order given in the table, until the problem is corrected.

Table 6-4. Troubleshooting Chart

Trouble Symptoms Probable Cause Corrective Measures

FCD-E1L is “dead” 1. No power Check that both ends of the power cable are

connected properly.

2. Blown fuse (AC

powered FCD-E1L only)

Disconnect the AC power cable from both ends and

replace with fuse of proper rating.

3. Defective FCD-E1L Replace the FCD-E1L.

Local FCD-E1L reports local

main link sync loss

1. External problem Activate the local analog loopback on the main link.

Check that the local FCD-E1L LOC SYNC LOSS indicator

turns OFF. If the indicator is OFF, the problem is

external.

2. Defective FCD-E1L Turn the FCD-E1L off for a few minutes, and then

turn it back on and read the alarm messages

generated during the power-up self-test. Replace the

FCD-E1L if a failure is detected.

Local user connected to the

FCD-E1L data channel cannot

communicate with the remote

equipment (main link operates

normally)

1. External problem Activate the local loopback on the data channel.

Check that the equipment connected to the channel

receives its own signal. If not, the problem is

external.

2. Defective FCD-E1L Turn the FCD-E1L off for a few minutes, and then

turn it back on and read the alarm messages

generated during the power-up self-test. Replace the

FCD-E1L if a failure is detected.

1. Loopback connected

on the FCD-E1L

If the TST indicator lights, check and disconnect the

loopback

ERR indicator in Ethernet

lights most of the time and

LAN cannot operate 2. Cable problem Check and replace if necessary the cable that

connects the FCD-E1L 10BaseT connector to the LAN

3. Problem on the LAN Disconnect the FCD-E1L from the LAN: if problem

disappears, troubleshoot the LAN

4. Defective FCD-E1L Turn the FCD-E1L off for a few minutes, and then

turn it back on and read the alarm messages

generated during the power-up self-test. Replace the

FCD-E1L if a failure is detected

Page 93: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Testing FCD-E1L 6-15

Trouble Symptoms Probable Cause Corrective Measures

LINK indicator in Ethernet

version is not lit

1. No active station on

the LAN

Check that at least one station is active on the LAN

2. Cable problem Check and replace if necessary the cable that

connects the FCD-E1L 10BaseT connector to the LAN

3. Problem on the LAN Check LAN media

4. Defective FCD-E1L Turn the FCD-E1L off for a few minutes, and then

turn it back on and read the alarm messages

generated during the power-up self-test. Replace the

FCD-E1L if a failure is detected

6.5 Testing FCD-E1L

The user-controlled test functions of FCD-E1L consist of diagnostic loopback tests. The purpose of these tests is to determine the source of a break in the data flow. By checking a variety of data paths, a series of loopback tests can pinpoint the source of the obstruction of data.

This section provides general instructions for running the tests, followed by a description of each test. The test descriptions include the terminal commands for each test.

Before executing a test, pay attention to the following:

• Not all of the loopback combinations are allowed. For the list of allowed and forbidden loopback combinations, refer to Allowed Loop Combinations on page 6-20.

• If a loopback is already connected, the TEST indicator lights.

• If you try to connect a loopback while another loopback of the same type is already connected, FCD-E1L displays an error message.

Operating Loopbacks from a Control Terminal

The diagnostic loops can be activated from a control terminal by entering the LP LOC ANA ML, LP REM ANA ML, LP LOC DIG ML, LP LOC CH 1, LP LOC CH 2, LP REM CH 1, LP REM CH 2, LP INBAND CH 1, or LP BERT CH 1 command.

The inband activated loopback and BER testing are not available on channel 2.

For general instructions on entering FCD-E1L commands from a control terminal, refer to Entering Commands on page 3-3 .

Note

Page 94: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

6-16 Testing FCD-E1L FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

User-Controlled Loopback Tests

The test and loopback functions are described in the following paragraphs. The test functions are identified by the command used to activate the corresponding test/loopback function.

No channel loopbacks are available for the Ethernet interface. In addition, main link loopbacks should not be activated on an FCD-E1L with Ethernet interface while the Ethernet interface is connected to the LAN. This would cause a state of permanent collision on the LAN (this would prevent other users from using the LAN as long as the loopback is connected).

Main Link Local Analog Loopback (LP LOC ANA ML)

This loopback is performed by connecting the main link transmit signal to the input of the receive path, as shown in Figure 6-1. The signal provided by the user's equipment connected to the data channel must receive its own transmission.

Local FCD-E1L

Processor

"1"

MainLink

DataChannel

User'sEquipment

Figure 6-1. Main Link Local Analog Loopback

Before connecting this loopback on an FCD-E1L with Ethernet interface, disconnect the LAN cable from the rear panel Ethernet interface.

This test fully checks local FCD-E1L operation and the connections to the local user’s equipment.

During the loopback, the local FCD-E1L sends an unframed “all-ones” signal to the remote FCD-E1L.

Main Link Remote Analog Loopback (LP REM ANA ML)

Locally performed analog loopback towards the remote equipment. The loopback connects, at the local FCD-E1L, the regenerated receive signal to the transmit input of the main link interface, as shown in Figure 6-2. The signal provided by the user's equipment connected to the data channel of the remote FCD-E1L must receive its own transmission.

This test checks the connections to the remote user’s equipment, all the circuits of the remote FCD-E1L, the main link interface functions of the remote and local FCD-E1L, and the transmission plant connecting the two FCD-E1L.

Note

Page 95: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Testing FCD-E1L 6-17

TransmissionPlant

Local FCD-E1L

ProcessorDataChannel Main

LinkUser's

Equipment

Remote FCD-E1L

Processor DataChannel

MainLink

User'sEquipment

Figure 6-2. Main Link Remote Analog Loopback

Main Link Local Digital Loopback (LP LOC DIG ML)

This loopback is performed by connecting the E1 digital transmit signal of the main link to the input of the receive path, without passing through the main link line interface. Signal paths are shown in Figure 6-3.

Before connecting this loopback on an FCD-E1L with Ethernet interface, disconnect the LAN cable from the rear panel Ethernet interface.

The signal provided by the equipment connected to the data channel must receive its own transmission.

This test checks the digital circuits of the local FCD-E1L (processor section), and the connections to the local user’s equipment.

Local FCD-E1L

Processor MainLink

"1"

DataChannel

User'sEquipment

Figure 6-3. Main Link Local Digital Loopback

Data Channel Local Loopback (LP LOC CH 1, LP LOC CH 2)

Local digital loopback towards the local user user’s equipment connected to the data channel the loopback is connected, performed by connecting the data channel transmit signal to the input of the receive path, as shown in Figure 6-4.

The test signal is provided by the local user’s equipment, which must receive its own transmission.

This test mainly checks the connections to the local user’s equipment.

Note

Page 96: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

6-18 Testing FCD-E1L FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

When an alarm condition is present on the main link, the receive data is held at MARK. Under these conditions, it is not possible to perform BER measurements when a local channel loopback is connected. If you try to measure BER, the result is invariably errors.

Local FCD-E1L

Processor

DataChannel

User'sEquipment

MainLink

Figure 6-4. Data Channel Local Loopback

Data Channel Remote Loopback (LP REM CH 1, LP REM CH 2)

Local digital loopback towards the remote user’s equipment connected to the data channel the loopback is connected. Performed by connecting the local data channel receive signal to the data channel transmit input, as shown in Figure 6-5. The test signal is provided by the remote user user’s equipment, which must receive its own transmission.

This test fully checks the user data link, including the cables connecting the remote user’s equipment to the FCD-E1L, the remote FCD-E1L, the transmission plant connecting the two FCD-E1L and the local FCD-E1L.

Local FCD-E1L

Processor MainLink

TransmissionPlant

Remote FCD-E1L

ProcessorMainLink

User'sEquipment

DataChannel

DataChannel

User'sEquipment

Figure 6-5. Data Channel Remote Loopback

Data Channel Inband-Activated Loopback (LP INBAND CH 1)

FCD-E1L supports both reception and transmission of the inband-activated loopback on channel 1.

The inband-activated channel loopback can be performed using two sites, Site A (transmitter) and Site B (receiver), and is similar to the data channel remote loopback, except that it is performed on the Site B FCD-E1L, in response to a command entered at the Site A FCD-E1L. The loopback is performed towards the Site A local user’s equipment connected to the data channel.

Note

Page 97: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Testing FCD-E1L 6-19

The remote loopback is activated and deactivated by transmitting special sequences for approximately 2 seconds from Site A unit causing it to enter the TX INBAND state.

When an inband loopback pattern is sent by the Site A equipment (connected to the main link of the Site B unit), and the Site B equipment BERT detects this pattern for approximately 2 seconds, a remote loop is initiated on the data channel of the Site B unit, causing it to enter the RX INBAND state. Once the remote data channel loopback is on, the Site B unit BERT tries to match loop deactivation series.

You can use a standard inband loop pattern in accordance with the ANSI FT1/FE1 RDL (T1.403) or select a pattern of your own.

In the first case (INBAND_LOOP_PATTERN set to RDL), when the LP INBAND CH 1 command is activated, the BERT sends a known polynomial series and initiates a remote data port loopback. On activation of the CLR LP INBAND CH 1 command, the BERT sends the loop deactivation series.

In the second case (INBAND_LOOP_PATTERN set to USER_CONFIG), when the LP INBAND CH 1 command is activated, the BERT sends a user-selected pattern consisting of 1 to 8 digits binary string and initiates a remote data port loopback. On activation of the CLR LP INBAND CH 1 command, the BERT sends the loop deactivation pattern, which is user-configured and contains 1 to 8 binary digits as well.

To enable the activation of a remote loopback in response to the reception of the inband loopback command from the remote system you must activate the DEF BERT CH 1 command and set the RX_INBAND parameter to ENABLE.

BER Testing (LP BERT CH 1)

BER testing (available on channel 1 only) can be performed in two ways:

• For a local test, use one of the local main link loopbacks, or any other loopback that returns the data towards the local user’s equipment at the desired location along the signal path.

• To perform the test over the whole link (end-to-end), use the inband activated loopback. Alternately, you can activate the BER test at both ends of the link; if the remote equipment does not support the BER test function, you can also use standard BER test equipment.

When the test is made from both ends, make sure to select the same test pattern at both ends of the link.

During the test, the local user’s equipment is disconnected and the DSR line in the data channel connector is switched off (for an FCD-E1L with Ethernet interface, the 10BaseT interface is internally disconnected from the external LAN media). The test signal is provided by an internal pattern generator, which connects the user-selected test sequence to the transmit input of the local data channel interface. To calibrate the system, the user can inject errors at a selectable rate.

At the same time, the received signal is connected to a pattern evaluator. The evaluator compares the received and transmitted patterns and detects errors.

Note

Page 98: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

6-20 Testing FCD-E1L FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

The test results are presented on the supervision terminal (see the DSP BERT CH 1 command in Error! Bookmark not defined.).

Ethernet Interface Loopbacks

For an FCD-E1L equipped with the IR-ETH or IR-ETH/QN interfaces, no loopbacks are available for the Ethernet bridge interface. In addition, main link loopbacks should not be activated on an FCD-E1L with Ethernet bridge interface while the Ethernet interface is connected to the LAN. This is because it would cause a state of permanent collision on the LAN (this would prevent other users from using the LAN as long as the loopback is connected).

For an FCD-E1L equipped with the Ethernet IP router (IR-IP) interface, a remote loopback can be activated by means of section 4 of its rear panel DIP switch. When section 4 is set to ON, the packets received from the WAN are returned toward the WAN, and the local Ethernet port is disconnected.

Allowed Loop Combinations

Not all of the loopback combinations are allowed.

The only two loopbacks that can be simultaneously activated on the main link are Remote Analog and Local Digital. The only two loopbacks that can be simultaneously activated on the data channel are T-inband and BERT. Table 6-5 illustrates legal and illegal combinations of the main link and data channel loopbacks.

If you try to activate an illegal loop combination, FCD-E1L sends a configuration error (ERROR 051: ILLEGAL PORT LOOP COMBINATION).

Table 6-5. Main Link and Data Channel Loopbacks Combinations

Data Channel/ Main Link

Local Remote BERT T-Inband R-Inband

Local analog Legal Illegal Legal Illegal Illegal

Local digital Legal Illegal Legal Illegal Illegal

Remote analog Legal Illegal Illegal Illegal Illegal

Page 99: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Technical Support 6-21

6.6 Frequently Asked Questions

Question: Can the E1 learning process be activated while the inband management is activated?

Answer: No. The learning process cannot work properly when inband management is activated. The inband management must be defined only after the learning process is finished.

Question: Does the FCD-E1L support the Digital Loop (LP REM CH 1) and Analog Loop (LP LOC CH 1) when it is configured for Unframed mode?

Answer: No.

Question: Does FCD-E1L have a card version?

Answer: No. Only the FCD-2L has a card version (FCD-2L/R).

6.7 Technical Support

Technical support for this product can be obtained from the local distributor from whom it was purchased.

For further information, please contact the RAD distributor nearest you or one of RAD's offices worldwide. This information can be found at www.rad.com (offices – About RAD > Worldwide Offices; distributors – Where to Buy > End Users).

Page 100: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Installation and Operation Manual

6-22 Technical Support FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Page 101: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Main Link Connectors A-1

Appendix A

Pinouts

A.1 Main Link Connectors

The unbalanced E1 port is terminated in two BNC connectors. The connectors are designated RX-IN and TX-OUT.

The balanced E1 port is terminated in an eight-pin RJ-45 connector, wired in accordance with Table A-1. Figure A-1 identifies the pins of the main link connector.

Table A-1. E1 Link Connector, Pin Allocation

Pin Designation Direction Function

1 RD(T) Input Receive data (tip)

2 RD(R) Input Receive data (ring)

3 GND ↔ Ground (optional)

4 TD(T) Output Transmit data (tip)

5 TD(R) Output Transmit data (ring)

6 GND ↔ Ground (optional)

7, 8 N/A N/A Not connected

Figure A-1. Main Link RJ-45 Connector, Pin Identification

Page 102: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix A Pinouts Installation and Operation Manual

A-2 V.24 Interface Connector FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

A.2 V.24 Interface Connector

The DHS module with the V.24 interface is supplied with a 25-pin D-type female connector. The pin allocation in the V.24 interface connector is given in Figure A-2 identifies the pins of the V.24 connector.

Pin 13 Pin 1

Pin 14Pin 25

Figure A-2. V.24 Connector, Pin Identification

Table A-2. V.24 Connector Wiring

Pin Designation Direction Function

1 FGND – Frame ground

2 TD IN TX data

3 RD OUT RX data

4 RTS IN Request to send

5 CTS OUT Clear to send

6 DSR OUT Data set ready

7 SGND – Signal ground

8 DCD OUT Carrier detect

9 NC – –

10 NC – –

11 NC – –

12 NC – –

13 NC – –

14 NC – –

15 TC OUT TX CLK

16 NC – –

17 RC OUT RX CLK

18 LLB IN Local loop

19 NC – –

20 ERC OUT External RX CLK

21 RLB IN Remote loop

22 NC – –

Page 103: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Pinouts

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Synchronous Data Channel Connector A-3

Pin Designation Direction Function

23 NC – –

24 ETC IN External TX CLK

25 TM OUT Test mode

A.3 Synchronous Data Channel Connector

The synchronous data channel of the FCD-E1L is terminated in a 25-pin D-type female connector, irrespective of the channel interface type. The pin allocation in is given in Table A-3. Figure A-3 identifies the pins of the data channel connector.

Pin 13 Pin 1

Pin 14Pin 25

Figure A-3. Data Channel Connector, Pin Identification

Table A-3. Data Channel Connector, Pin Allocation

Pin Direction Designation Function RS-530 Circuit

1 ↔ FG Frame Ground AA

2 Input SDA Send Data (wire A) BA(A)

3 Output RDA Receive Data (wire A) BB(A)

4 Input RTSA RTS (wire A) CA(A)

5 Output CTSA CTS (wire A) CB(A)

6 Output DSRA DSR (wire A) CC(A)

7 ↔ SG Signal Ground AB

8 Output DCDA DCD (wire A) CF(A)

9 Output RCB Receive Clock (wire B) DD(B)

10 Output DCDB DCD (wire B) CF(B)

11 Input SCEB External Send Clock (wire B) DA(B)

12 Output SCB Send Clock (wire B) DB(B)

13 Output CTSB CTS (wire B) CB(B)

14 Input SDB Send Data (wire B) BA(B)

15 Output SCA Send Clock (wire A) DB(A)

16 Output RDB Receive Data (wire B) BB(B)

17 Output RCA Receive Clock (wire A) DD(A)

18 Input LLBA Local Loopback Activation (wire A) –

Page 104: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix A Pinouts Installation and Operation Manual

A-4 Synchronous Data Channel Connector FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Pin Direction Designation Function RS-530 Circuit

19 Input RTSB RTS (wire B) CA(B)

20 Input DTRA/RCEA DTRA/External Receive Clock (wire A) CD(A)

21 Input RLBA Remote Loopback Activation (wire A) –

22 Output DSRB DSR (wire B) CC(B)

23 Input DTRB/RCEB DTRB/External Receive Clock (wire B) CD(B)

24 Input SCEA External Send Clock (wire A) DA(A)

25 Output TMA Test Mode Indication (wire A) –

RS-530 Data Channel

The functions of the pins in the RS-530 data channel interface connector are listed in Table A-3. The following sections provide information on the cables required to connect user’s equipment to the RS-530 channel in the various timing modes.

DCE Mode

This mode is used to connect to user’s equipment with DTE interface. The user’s equipment can be directly connected to the FCD-E1L channel connector using a standard “straight” RS-530 cable (i.e., a cable wired point-to-point). The “straight” cable is terminated in a 25-pin male D-type connector at the FCD-E1L side.

DTE1 Mode

This mode is used to connect to user’s equipment with DCE interface that can accept, as its external clock, the receive clock signal provided by the FCD-E1L data channel.

In this case, it is necessary to connect a 25-pin male/25-pin male cross-cable (see Figure A-4) wired in accordance with Table A-4, between the FCD-E1L CHANNEL connector and the user’s equipment RS-530 connector.

Figure A-4. RS-530 Adapter Cable for DTE1 Mode

Page 105: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Pinouts

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Synchronous Data Channel Connector A-5

Table A-4. Wiring of RS-530 Adapter Cable for DTE1 Mode

FCD-E1L Side Designation Function User’s Side

1 FG Frame Ground 1

2 SDA Send Data (wire A) 3

3 RDA Receive Data (wire A) 2

4 RTSA RTS (wire A) 8

5 CTSA CTS (wire A) –

6 DSRA DSR (wire A) 20

7 SG Signal Ground 7

8 DCDA DCD (wire A) 4

9 RCB Receive Clock (wire B) 11

10 DCDB DCD (wire B) 19

11 SCEB External Send Clock (wire B) 9

12 SCB Send Clock (wire B) –

13 CTSB CTS (wire B) –

14 SDB Send Data (wire B) 16

15 SCA Send Clock (wire A) –

16 RDB Receive Data (wire B) 14

17 RCA Receive Clock (wire A) 24

18 – Not connected –

19 RTSB RTS (wire B) 10

20 RCEA External Receive Clock (wire A) –

21 – Not connected –

22 DSRB DSR (wire B) 23

23 RCEB External Receive Clock (wire B) –

24 SCEA External Send Clock (wire A) 17

25 – Not connected –

DTE2 Mode

This mode is used to connect to user’s equipment with DCE interface that provides the transmit and receive clocks to the FCD-E1L data channel.

In this case, it is necessary to connect a 25-pin male/25-pin male cross-cable (see Figure A-4) wired in accordance with Table A-5, between the FCD-E1L CHANNEL connector and the user’s equipment RS-530 connector.

Page 106: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix A Pinouts Installation and Operation Manual

A-6 Synchronous Data Channel Connector FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Table A-5. Wiring of RS-530 Adapter Cable for DTE2 Mode

FCD-E1L Side Designation Function User’s Side

1 FG Frame Ground 1

2 SDA Send Data (wire A) 3

3 RDA Receive Data (wire A) 2

4 RTSA RTS (wire A) 8

5 CTSA CTS (wire A) –

6 DSRA DSR (wire A) 20

7 SG Signal Ground 7

8 DCDA DCD (wire A) 4

9 RCB Receive Clock (wire B) –

10 DCDB DCD (wire B) 19

11 SCEB External Send Clock (wire B) 9

12 SCB Send Clock (wire B) –

13 CTSB CTS (wire B) –

14 SDB Send Data (wire B) 16

15 SCA Send Clock (wire A) –

16 RDB Receive Data (wire B) 14

17 RCA Receive Clock (wire A) –

18 – Not connected –

19 RTSB RTS (wire B) 10

20 RCEA External Receive Clock (wire A) 15

21 – Not connected –

22 DSRB DSR (wire B) 23

23 RCEB External Receive Clock (wire B) 12

24 SCEA External Send Clock (wire A) 17

25 – Not connected –

V.35 Data Channel

The following sections provide information on the cables required to connect user’s equipment to the V.35 channel in the various timing modes.

DCE Mode

This mode is used to connect to user’s equipment with V.35 DTE interface. The V.35 cable coming from the user’s equipment is connected to the FCD-E1L CHANNEL connector through an adapter cable. The adapter cable (see Figure A-5) is terminated in a 25-pin male D-type connector at the FCD-E1L side, and a

Page 107: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Pinouts

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Synchronous Data Channel Connector A-7

34-pin female connector at the user’s side. A suitable cable, designated CBL-HS2V1, is available from RAD.

Cable wiring is given in Table A-6.

Figure A-5. V.35 Adapter Cable for DCE Mode

Table A-6. Wiring of V.35 Adapter Cable for DCE Mode

FCD-E1L Side Designation Function User’s Side

1 FG Frame Ground A

2 SDA Send Data (wire A) P

3 RDA Receive Data (wire A) R

4 RTSA RTS (wire A) C

5 CTSA CTS (wire A) D

6 DSRA DSR (wire A) E

7 SG Signal Ground B

8 DCDA DCD (wire A) F

9 RCB Receive Clock (wire B) X

10 DCDB DCD (wire B) –

11 SCEB External Send Clock (wire B) W

12 SCB Send Clock (wire B) AA

13 CTSB CTS (wire B) –

14 SDB Send Data (wire B) S

15 SCA Send Clock (wire A) Y

16 RDB Receive Data (wire B) T

17 RCA Receive Clock (wire A) V

18 – Not connected –

19 RTSB RTS (wire B) –

20 RCEA External Receive Clock (wire A) –

21 – Not connected –

22 DSRB DSR (wire B) –

Page 108: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix A Pinouts Installation and Operation Manual

A-8 Synchronous Data Channel Connector FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

FCD-E1L Side Designation Function User’s Side

23 RCEB External Receive Clock (wire B) –

24 SCEA External Send Clock (wire A) U

25 – Not connected –

DTE1 Mode

This mode is used to connect to user’s equipment with V.35 DCE interface that can accept, as its external clock, the receive clock signal provided by the FCD-E1L data channel.

The V.35 cable coming from the user’s equipment is connected to the FCD-E1L CHANNEL connector through an adapter cable. The adapter cable (see Figure A-5) is terminated in a 25-pin male D-type connector at the FCD-E1L side, and a 34-pin female connector at the user’s side. A suitable cable, designated CBL-HS2V2, is available from RAD.

Cable wiring is given in Table A-7.

Table A-7. Wiring of V.35 Adapter Cable for DTE1 Mode

FCD-E1L Side Designation Function User’s Side

1 FG Frame Ground A

2 SDA Send Data (wire A) R

3 RDA Receive Data (wire A) P

4 RTSA RTS (wire A) F

5 CTSA CTS (wire A) –

6 DSRA DSR (wire A) H

7 SG Signal Ground B

8 DCDA DCD (wire A) C

9 RCB Receive Clock (wire B) W

10 DCDB DCD (wire B) –

11 SCEB External Send Clock (wire B) X

12 SCB Send Clock (wire B) –

13 CTSB CTS (wire B) –

14 SDB Send Data (wire B) T

15 SCA Send Clock (wire A) –

16 RDB Receive Data (wire B) S

17 RCA Receive Clock (wire A) U

18 – Not connected –

19 RTSB RTS (wire B) –

20 RCEA External Receive Clock (wire A) –

21 – Not connected –

Page 109: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Pinouts

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Synchronous Data Channel Connector A-9

FCD-E1L Side Designation Function User’s Side

22 DSRB DSR (wire B) –

23 RCEB External Receive Clock (wire B) –

24 SCEA External Send Clock (wire A) V

25 – Not connected –

DTE2 Mode

This mode is used to connect to user’s equipment with V.35 DCE interface that provides the transmit and receive clocks to the FCD-E1L data channel.

The V.35 cable coming from the user’s equipment is connected to the FCD-E1L CHANNEL connector through an adapter cable. The adapter cable (see Figure A-5) is terminated in a 25-pin male D-type connector at the FCD-E1L side, and a 34-pin female connector at the user’s side. A suitable cable, designated CBL-HS2V3, is available from RAD.

Cable wiring is given in Table A-8.

Table A-8. Wiring of V.35 Adapter Cable for DTE2 Mode

FCD-E1L Side Designation Function User’s Side

1 FG Frame Ground A

2 SDA Send Data (wire A) R

3 RDA Receive Data (wire A) P

4 RTSA RTS (wire A) F

5 CTSA CTS (wire A) –

6 DSRA DSR (wire A) H

7 SG Signal Ground B

8 DCDA DCD (wire A) C

9 RCB Receive Clock (wire B) –

10 DCDB DCD (wire B) –

11 SCEB External Send Clock (wire B) X

12 SCB Send Clock (wire B) –

13 CTSB CTS (wire B) –

14 SDB Send Data (wire B) T

15 SCA Send Clock (wire A) –

16 RDB Receive Data (wire B) S

17 RCA Receive Clock (wire A) –

18 – Not connected –

19 RTSB RTS (wire B) –

Page 110: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix A Pinouts Installation and Operation Manual

A-10 Synchronous Data Channel Connector FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

FCD-E1L Side Designation Function User’s Side

20 RCEA External Receive Clock (wire A) Y

21 – Not connected –

22 DSRB DSR (wire B) –

23 RCEB External Receive Clock (wire B) AA

24 SCEA External Send Clock (wire A) V

25 – Not connected –

X.21 Data Channel

For the X.21 port, only the DCE mode cable is available from RAD.

This mode is used to connect to user’s equipment with X.21 DTE interface. The X.21 cable coming from the user’s equipment is connected to the FCD-E1L CHANNEL connector through an adapter cable. The adapter cable (see Figure A-6) is terminated in a 25-pin male D-type connector at the FCD-E1L side, and a 15-pin female connector at the user’s side. A suitable cable, designated CBL-HS2X1, is available from RAD.

Cable wiring is given in Table A-9.

Figure A-6. X.21 Adapter Cable for DCE Mode

Table A-9. Wiring of X.21 Adapter Cable for DCE Mode

FCD-E1L Side Designation Function User’s Side

1 FG Frame Ground 1

2 SDA Send Data (wire A) 2

3 RDA Receive Data (wire A) 4

4 RTSA RTS (wire A) 3

5 CTSA CTS (wire A) –

6 DSRA DSR (wire A) –

7 SG Signal Ground 8

8 DCDA DCD (wire A) 5

9 RCB Receive Clock (wire B) –

10 DCDB DCD (wire B) 12

Page 111: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Pinouts

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Synchronous Data Channel Connector A-11

FCD-E1L Side Designation Function User’s Side

11 SCEB External Send Clock (wire B) –

12 SCB Send Clock (wire B) 13

13 CTSB CTS (wire B) –

14 SDB Send Data (wire B) 9

15 SCA Send Clock (wire A) 6

16 RDB Receive Data (wire B) 11

17 RCA Receive Clock (wire A) –

18 – Not connected –

19 RTSB RTS (wire B) 10

20 RCEA External Receive Clock (wire A) –

21 – Not connected –

22 DSRB DSR (wire B) –

23 RCEB External Receive Clock (wire B) –

24 SCEA External Send Clock (wire A) –

25 – Not connected –

V.36/RS-449 Data Channel

The following sections provide information on the cables required to connect user’s equipment to the V.36/RS-449 channel in the various timing modes.

DCE Mode

This mode is used to connect to user’s equipment with V.36/RS-449 DTE interface. The V.36/RS-449 cable coming from the user’s equipment is connected to the FCD-E1L CHANNEL connector through an adapter cable. The adapter cable (see Figure A-7) is terminated in a 25-pin male D-type connector at the FCD-E1L side, and a 37-pin female connector at the user’s side. A suitable cable, designated CBL-HS2R1, is available from RAD.

Cable wiring is given in Table A-10.

,

Figure A-7. V.36/RS-449 Adapter Cable for DCE Mode

Page 112: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix A Pinouts Installation and Operation Manual

A-12 Synchronous Data Channel Connector FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Table A-10. Wiring of V.36/RS-449 Adapter Cable for DCE Mode

FCD-E1L Side Designation Function User’s Side

1 FG Frame Ground 1

2 SDA Send Data (wire A) 4

3 RDA Receive Data (wire A) 6

4 RTSA RTS (wire A) 7

5 CTSA CTS (wire A) 9

6 DSRA DSR (wire A) 11

7 SG Signal Ground 19

8 DCDA DCD (wire A) 13

9 RCB Receive Clock (wire B) 26

10 DCDB DCD (wire B) 31

11 SCEB External Send Clock (wire B) 35

12 SCB Send Clock (wire B) 23

13 CTSB CTS (wire B) 27

14 SDB Send Data (wire B) 22

15 SCA Send Clock (wire A) 5

16 RDB Receive Data (wire B) 24

17 RCA Receive Clock (wire A) 8

18 – Not connected –

19 RTSB RTS (wire B) 25

20 RCEA External Receive Clock (wire A)

21 – Not connected –

22 DSRB DSR (wire B) 29

23 RCEB External Receive Clock (wire B) –

24 SCEA External Send Clock (wire A) 17

25 – Not connected –

DTE1 Mode

This mode is used to connect to user’s equipment with V.36/RS-449 DCE interface that can accept, as its external clock, the receive clock signal provided by the FCD-E1L data channel.

The V.36/RS-449 cable coming from the user’s equipment is connected to the FCD-E1L CHANNEL connector through an adapter cable. The adapter cable (see Figure A-7) is terminated in a 25-pin male D-type connector at the FCD-E1L side, and a 37-pin female connector at the user’s side. A suitable cable, designated CBL-HS2R2, is available from RAD.

Cable wiring is given in Table A-11.

Page 113: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Pinouts

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Synchronous Data Channel Connector A-13

Table A-11. Wiring of V.36/RS-449 Adapter Cable for DTE1 Mode

FCD-E1L Side Designation Function User’s Side

1 FG Frame Ground 1

2 SDA Send Data (wire A) 6

3 RDA Receive Data (wire A) 4

4 RTSA RTS (wire A) 13

5 CTSA CTS (wire A) –

6 DSRA DSR (wire A) 12

7 SG Signal Ground 19

8 DCDA DCD (wire A) 7

9 RCB Receive Clock (wire B) 35

10 DCDB DCD (wire B) 25

11 SCEB External Send Clock (wire B) 26

12 SCB Send Clock (wire B) –

13 CTSB CTS (wire B) –

14 SDB Send Data (wire B) 24

15 SCA Send Clock (wire A) –

16 RDB Receive Data (wire B) 22

17 RCA Receive Clock (wire A) 17

18 – Not connected –

19 RTSB RTS (wire B) 31

20 RCEA External Receive Clock (wire A) –

21 – Not connected –

22 DSRB DSR (wire B) 24

23 RCEB External Receive Clock (wire B) –

24 SCEA External Send Clock (wire A) 8

25 – Not connected –

DTE2 Mode

This mode is used to connect to user’s equipment with V.36/RS-449 DCE interface that provides the transmit and receive clocks to the FCD-E1L data channel.

The V.36/RS-449 cable coming from the user’s equipment is connected to the FCD-E1L CHANNEL connector through an adapter cable. The adapter cable (see Figure A-7) is terminated in a 25-pin male D-type connector at the FCD-E1L side, and a 37-pin female connector at the user’s side. A suitable cable, designated CBL-HS2R3, is available from RAD.

Cable wiring is given in Table A-12.

Page 114: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix A Pinouts Installation and Operation Manual

A-14 Synchronous Data Channel Connector FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Table A-12. Wiring of V.36/RS-449 Adapter Cable for DTE2 Mode

FCD-E1L Side Designation Function User’s Side

1 FG Frame Ground 1

2 SDA Send Data (wire A) 6

3 RDA Receive Data (wire A) 4

4 RTSA RTS (wire A) 13

5 CTSA CTS (wire A) –

6 DSRA DSR (wire A) 12

7 SG Signal Ground 19

8 DCDA DCD (wire A) 7

9 RCB Receive Clock (wire B) –

10 DCDB DCD (wire B) 25

11 SCEB External Send Clock (wire B) 26

12 SCB Send Clock (wire B) –

13 CTSB CTS (wire B) –

14 SDB Send Data (wire B) 24

15 SCA Send Clock (wire A) –

16 RDB Receive Data (wire B) 22

17 RCA Receive Clock (wire A) –

18 – Not connected –

19 RTSB RTS (wire B) 31

20 RCEA External Receive Clock (wire A) 5

21 – Not connected –

22 DSRB DSR (wire B) 24

23 RCEB External Receive Clock (wire B) 23

24 SCEA External Send Clock (wire A) 8

25 – Not connected –

Page 115: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Pinouts

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 CONTROL DCE Connector A-15

A.4 CONTROL DCE Connector

The CONTROL DCE connector is a 9-pin female connector which contains an RS-232 DCE interface, intended for direct connection to a supervision terminal. For pin connection functions see Table A-13.

• The connection of the CONTROL DCE connector to a supervision terminal having a 9-pin connector is made by means of a straight cable (a cable wired point-to-point).

• The connection to a terminal with 25-pin female connector is made by means of a crossed cable, wired in accordance with Figure A-8.

Table A-13. CONTROL DCE Connector Wiring

Pin Line Direction

1 Data Carrier Detect (DCD) From FCD-E1L

2 Receive Data (RD) From FCD-E1L

3 Transmit Data (TD) To FCD-E1L

4 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) To FCD-E1L

5 Ground (GND) ↔

6 Data Set Ready (DSR) From FCD-E1L

7 Request to Send (RTS) To FCD-E1L

8 Clear to Send (CTS) From FCD-E1L

9 Ring Indicator (RI) To FCD-E1L

To TerminalTo CONTROL DCE Connector

FCD-E1L Side Terminal Side

TD

RTS

CTS

DSR

DCD

RI

DTR

GND

RD

3

2

7

8

6

1

9

4

5

2

3

4

5

6

8

22

20

7

25-PinConnector

9-Pin Connector

Figure A-8. 25-Pin Terminal Cable Wiring - Connection to CONTROL DCE Connector

Page 116: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix A Pinouts Installation and Operation Manual

A-16 CONTROL DCE Connector FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Page 117: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 SNMP Environment B-1

Appendix B

SNMP Management

This appendix provides specific information required for the management of FCD-E1L units by means of the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). Some of this information is also applicable for management by means of the Telnet application.

B.1 SNMP Environment

The SNMP management functions of the FCD-E1L are provided by an internal SNMP agent, which can use inband and out-of-band communication.

The SNMP management communication uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP), which is a connectionless-mode transport protocol, part of the suite of protocols of the Internet Protocol (IP).

Telnet management uses the TCP protocol over IP for management communication. After a Telnet session is started, the management interface is similar to that used for the supervision terminal.

This section covers the information related to the SNMP environment. For a description of the IP environment, refer to the IP Environment section on page B-4.

SNMP Principles

The SNMP management protocol is an asynchronous command/response polling protocol. The SNMP-based network management station, which addresses the managed entities in its management domain, initiates all the management traffic. Only the addressed managed entity answers the polling of the management station (except for trap messages).

The managed entities include a function called an “SNMP agent”, which is responsible for the interpretation and handling of the management station requests to the managed entity, and the generation of properly-formatted responses to the management station.

Note

Page 118: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix B SNMP Management Installation and Operation Manual

B-2 SNMP Environment FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

SNMP Operations

The SNMP protocol includes four types of operations:

getRequest Command for retrieving specific management information from the managed entity. The managed entity responds with a getResponse message.

getNextRequest Command for retrieving sequentially specific management information from the managed entity. The managed entity responds with a getResponse message.

setRequest Command for manipulating specific management information within the managed entity. The managed entity responds with a setResponse message.

trap Management message carrying unsolicited information on extraordinary events (e.g., alarms) reported by the managed entity.

The Management Information Base

The management information base (MIB) includes a collection of managed objects. A managed object is defined as a parameter that can be managed, such as a performance statistics value.

The MIB includes the definitions of relevant managed objects. Various MIBs can be defined for various management purposes, types of equipment, etc.

An object's definition includes the range of values and the “access” rights:

Read-only Object value can be read, but cannot be set.

Read-write Object value can be read or set.

Write-only Object value can be set, but cannot be read.

Not accessible Object cannot be read, nor set.

MIB Structure

The MIB has an inverted tree-like structure, with each definition of a managed object forming one leaf, located at the end of a branch of that tree. A unique path reaches each “leaf” in the MIB, therefore by numbering the branching points, starting with the top, each leaf can be uniquely defined by a sequence of numbers. The formal description of the managed objects and the MIB structure is provided in a special standardized format, called Abstract Syntax Notation 1 (ASN.1).

Since the general collection of MIB's can also be organized in a similar structure, under the supervision of the Internet Activities Board (IAB), any parameter included in a MIB that is recognized by the IAB is uniquely defined.

To provide the flexibility necessary in a global structure, MIB's are classified in various classes (branches), one of them being the experimental branch, and another the group of private (enterprise-specific) branch.

Under the private (enterprise-specific) branch of MIB's, each enterprise (manufacturer) can be assigned a number, which is its enterprise number. The assigned number designates the top of an enterprise-specific sub-tree of

Page 119: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B SNMP Management

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 SNMP Environment B-3

non-standard MIB's. Within this context, RAD has been assigned the enterprise number 164. Therefore, enterprise MIB's published by RAD can be found under 1.3.6.1.4.1.164.

MIB's of general interest are published by the IAB in the form of a Request for Comment (RFC) document. In addition, MIB's are also often assigned informal names that reflect their primary purpose. Enterprise-specific MIB's are published and distributed by their originator, which is responsible for their contents.

MIB's Supported by the FCD-E1L SNMP Agent

The interpretation of the relevant MIB's is a function of the SNMP agent of each managed entity. The general MIB's supported by the FCD-E1L SNMP agent are as follows:

• RFC 1213 (standard MIB-II).

• RFC 1406 (standard E1/T1 MIB).

In addition, the FCD-E1L SNMP agent supports the RAD-private (enterprise-specific) MIB identified as (read the following as a continuous string): iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).private(4).enterprises(1). rad(164).radGen(6).systems(1).radSysWAN(3).radFcdE1L(29)

Enterprise-specific MIB's supported by RAD equipment, including those for the FCD-E1L, are available in ASN.1 format from the RAD Technical Support Department.

Management Domains Under SNMP

In principle, SNMP enables any management station that knows the MIB's supported by a device to perform all the management operations available on that device. However, this is not desirable in practical situations, so it is necessary to provide a means to delimit management domains.

SNMP Communities

To enable the delimitation of management domains, SNMP uses “communities”. Each community is identified by a name, which is an alphanumeric string defined by the user.

Any SNMP entity (this term includes both managed entities and management stations) is assigned by its user a community name.

Access Restriction Using SNMP Communities

In general, SNMP agents support two types of access rights:

• Read-only: the SNMP agent accepts and processes only SNMP getRequest and getNextRequest commands from management stations which have the same read-only community name.

• Read-write: the SNMP agent accepts and processes all the SNMP commands received from a management station with the same write community name.

In accordance with the SNMP protocol, the SNMP community of the originating entity is sent in each message.

Page 120: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix B SNMP Management Installation and Operation Manual

B-4 IP Environment FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

When an SNMP message is received by the addressed entity, first it checks the originator's community. If the community name of the message originator differs from the community name specified for that type of message in the agent, the message it discarded (SNMP agents of managed entities report this event by means of an authentication failure trap).

FCD-E1L Unit Communities

The SNMP agents of FCD-E1L units are programmed to recognize the following community types:

Read SNMP community that has read-only authorization, i.e., the SNMP agent will accept only getRequest and getNextRequest commands from management stations using that community.

Write SNMP community that has read-write authorization, i.e., the SNMP agent will also accept setRequest commands from management stations using that community.

Trap SNMP community that the SNMP agent will send within trap messages.

B.2 IP Environment

IP Address Structure

Under the IP protocol, each IP network element (SNMP agents, network management stations, etc.) is called an IP host and must be assigned an IP address. An IP address is a 32-bit number, usually represented as four 8-bit bytes. Each byte represents a decimal number in the range of 0 through 255.

The address is given in decimal format, with the bytes separated by decimal points, e.g., 164.90.70.47. This format is called dotted quad notation.

An IP address is logically divided into two main portions:

• Network Portion. The Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) assigns the network portion. There are five IP address classes: A, B, C, D, and E. However, only the classes A, B and C are used for IP addressing. Consult your network manager with respect to the class of IP addresses used on your network.

The network portion of an IP address can be one, two or three bytes long, in accordance with the IP address class. This arrangement is illustrated below:

Page 121: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B SNMP Management

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 IP Environment B-5

IP ADDRESS

Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4

Class A Network Portion Host Portion

Class B Network Portion Host Portion

Class C Network Portion Host Portion

The class of each IP address can be determined from its leftmost byte, in accordance with the following chart:

Address Class First Byte Address Range

Class A 0 through 127 0.H.H.H through 127.H.H.H

Class B 128 through 191 128.N.H.H through 191.N.H.H

Class C 192 through 223 192.N.N.H through 223.N.N.H

N - indicates bytes that are part of the network portion H - indicates bytes that are part of the host portion

• Host Portion. The host portion is used to identify an individual host connected to the network. The host identifier is assigned by the using organization, in accordance with its specific needs.

Often, the host portion is further subdivided into two portions:

Subnet number. For example, subnet numbers can be used to identify departmental subnetworks. The subnet number follows the network identifier.

Host number - the last bits of the IP address.

The all-zero host identifier is always interpreted as a network identifier, and must not be assigned to an actual host.

Net and Subnet Masks

Net and subnet masks are used to help filter the relevant traffic more efficiently: the function of the net and subnet mask is to specify how many of the IP address bits are actually used for the net identifier and for the subnet number.

The mask is a 32-bit word that includes “ones” in the positions used for net and subnet identifications, followed by “zeros” up to the end of the IP address. For example, the subnet mask corresponding to the Class C IP address 194.227.31.67 is 255.255.255.000.

Note

Page 122: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix B SNMP Management Installation and Operation Manual

B-6 Handling of Management Traffic FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Recommendations for Selection of IP Addresses

When the FCD-E1L SNMP agent and its management station are connected to the same network, the network identifier part of the IP address assigned to the SNMP agent must be identical to the network identifier part of the IP address of the management station.

However, the agent and the FCD-E1L SNMP management station can also be on different IP networks. In this case, each one will be assigned IP addresses according to its IP network.

You can also specify a default gateway. The default gateway is the router to be used by default for routing the management traffic to the management station (located on a different IP network).

Automatic Routing of IP Traffic

The SNMP agent of the FCD-E1L unit includes an IP router function, that is used to route management messages automatically.

The IP router function operates both on the inband, as well as on the out-of-band traffic, depending on the communication methods enabled by the user.

B.3 Handling of Management Traffic

Handling of Out-of-Band Communication

Out-of-band communication is performed via the CONTROL DCE port.

To select the management mode, use the DEF SP command. Configure the AUXILIARY_DEVICE parameter as follows:

• TERMINAL – if only the ASCII supervision terminal must be supported

• NMS-SLIP – when the supervisory port must be able to use the SLIP protocol, for example SNMP or Telnet management.

• SLIP-AGENT – when the supervisory port must be connected to another agent port using the SLIP protocol

A serial port can be configured for management access only when its interface is configured as DCE.

Handling of Inband Communication

When using inband communication, the internal IP router can receive the management traffic through the main link.

Inband Communication Ports and Protocols

When using inband communication, you can select between the following transmission protocols:

Note

Page 123: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B SNMP Management

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Handling of Management Traffic B-7

• Management traffic carried within the E1 frame overhead. This communication mode uses the RAD proprietary protocol, which requires a small fraction of the link bandwidth: the management traffic is carried by means of the national bits, Sa4 through Sa8, in timeslot 0 (each bit can carry a data rate of 4 kbps).

• Management traffic carried in a dedicated timeslot. This communication mode supports the following protocols:

RAD proprietary protocol

Frame relay encapsulation in accordance with RFC 1490

When a dedicated timeslot is used, the data rate is set to 64 kbps.

Inband Management Traffic Routing

The IP router function uses the RAD proprietary routing protocol whenever it operates in a network environment consisting of RAD products.

In addition, you can configure the IP router to use standard protocols (such as frame relay), when connecting directly to a router.

• The RAD proprietary routing protocol is used with the timeslot 0 and the dedicated timeslot option.

When the IP router function is configured to use the RAD proprietary protocol, it collects information on the other SNMP agents by exchanging routing information (including the contents of each router's routing table), with its neighbors. This automatic learning capability enables using any network topology, including topologies with closed loops.

Note that an SNMP agent accepts routing information messages only through the port defined as AGENT port, or through inband management.

• When the management traffic is carried in a dedicated timeslot, it is also possible to use frame relay encapsulation in accordance with RFC 1490. This enables using frame relay routers to carry the management traffic to the managed FCD-E1L.

• Frame relay encapsulation is used as follows:

In the transmit direction, the SNMP agent encapsulates the management messages in frames with a predetermined DLCI (always DLCI 100), and sends them at the selected rate through the selected main link timeslot.

In the receive direction, the SNMP agent monitors the specified timeslot, analyzes packets received with DLCI 100, and analyzes the received data to detect management messages (any such messages are then processed as usual).

The SNMP agent does not support frame relay management protocols (ANSI T1.617 Annex D, LMI, etc.), nor is such support required.

The RAD proprietary protocol provides better routing capabilities, therefore it is recommended to use it whenever feasible.

Note

Page 124: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix B SNMP Management Installation and Operation Manual

B-8 SNMP Traps FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Preventing Management Access to the Other Network Equipment

By default, the internal IP router function of the FCD-E1L SNMP agent will route management traffic received through any link configured for management access, to all the other links and ports that are also configured for management access.

There are certain applications in which this is not desirable: a particular configuration of this type is a link that ends in equipment managed by a “foreign” management station, which should not be able to access the other equipment in the network.

To prevent a management station from accessing other equipment through the IP router function of the FCD-E1L SNMP agent, the user can configure that link for operation using a dedicated timeslot for management traffic but without enabling any routing protocol.

B.4 SNMP Traps

The FCD-E1L SNMP agent supports the standard MIB-II traps.

Page 125: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 E1 Environment C-1

Appendix C

Operating Environment

This appendix presents a concise description of the operating environment of FCD-E1L systems, to provide the background information required for understanding the FCD-E1L configuration and performance monitoring parameters.

C.1 E1 Environment

The E1 line interfaces of FCD-E1L comply with the applicable requirements of ITU-T Rec. G.703, G.704, G.711, G.732, G.736 and G.823.

E1 Signal Structure

The E1 line operates at a nominal rate of 2.048 Mbps, using a line signal encoded according to High-Density Bipolar 3 (HDB3) code. The data transferred over the E1 line is organized in frames. Each E1 frame includes 256 bits.

The E1 frame format is shown in Figure C-1.

Time Slot 0 Time Slot 16 Time Slots 1-15, 17-31

FAS MAS

a. Even Frames (0,2,4-14)

b. Odd Frames (1,3,5-15)

a. Frame 0

b. Frames 1-15Channel Data

1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1

I 1 A N N N N N

0 0 0 0 X Y X X

A B C D A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

32 Time Slots/Frame

8 Bits perTime Slot

16 Frames/Multiframe

TS0

TS1

TS2

TS3

TS4

TS5

TS6

TS7

TS8

TS9

TS10

TS11

TS12

TS13

TS14

TS15

TS16

TS17

TS18

TS19

TS20

TS21

TS22

TS23

TS24

TS25

TS26

TS27

TS28

TS29

TS30

TS31

FR0

FR1

FR2

FR3

FR4

FR5

FR6

FR7

FR8

FR9

FR10

FR11

FR12

FR13

FR14

FR15

Notes

ABCDXYMAS

INAFAS

International BitNational Bits (Sa4 through Sa8)Alarm Indication Signal (Loss of Frame Alignment - Red Alarm)Frame Alignment Signal, occupies alternate(but not necessarily even) frames

ABCD Signaling BitsExtra BitLoss of Multiframe AlignmentMultiframe Alignment Signal

Figure C-1. E1 Frame Format

Page 126: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix C Operating Environment Installation and Operation Manual

C-2 E1 Environment FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

The 256 bits included in a frame are organized of 32 timeslots of eight bits each. The frame repetition rate is 8,000 per second, therefore the data rate supported by each timeslot is 64 kbps. The number of timeslots available for user data is maximum 31, because timeslot 0 is always used for frame synchronization.

The frames are organized in larger patterns, called multiframes. Two types of multiframes are generally used:

• G732N (also called 256N) multiframes.

• G732S (also called 256S) multiframes.

G732N Multiframe

The G732N multiframe structure consists of two frames, which are identified by means of the information included in timeslot 0:

• The even frame of the pair includes the frame alignment signal (FAS).

• The odd frame includes a “1” in bit position 2, and housekeeping information in the other bits.

The number of timeslots available for user’s data is 31, and therefore the maximum payload rate is 1984 kbps.

G732S Multiframe

The G732S multiframe includes 16 frames, which are identified by means of a separate multiframe alignment signal (MAS) contained in timeslot 16 of frame number 0 of each multiframe.

Since timeslot 16 must be reserved for the transmission of the MAS and system signaling, only 30 timeslots are available for the user’s payload, and the maximum payload rate is 1920 kbps.

When using the G732S multiframe format, timeslots 16 in the 16 frames of each multiframe carry the following information:

• The first four bits of timeslot 16 of frame number 0 in multiframe 16 always carry the multiframe alignment sequence, 0000.

• Bit 6 in timeslot 16 of frame number 0 in multiframe 16 is used to notify the equipment at the other end of the link that the local equipment lost multiframe alignment.

• The other bits of this timeslot are not assigned mandatory functions.

E1 Line Signal

The E1 line signal uses the High-Density Bipolar 3 (HDB3) code. The HDB3 coding format is an improvement of the alternate mark inversion (AMI) code.

In the AMI format, “ones” are alternately transmitted as positive and negative pulses, whereas “zeros” are transmitted as a zero voltage level. The AMI format cannot transmit long strings of “zeros”, because such strings do not carry timing information.

The HDB3 coding rules restrict the maximum length of a “zero” string to three pulse intervals. Longer strings are encoded at the transmit end to introduce non-zero pulses. To allow the receiving end to detect the artificially introduced

Page 127: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix C Operating Environment

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 E1 Environment C-3

pulses and enable their removal to restore the original data string, the encoding introduces intentional bipolar violations in the data sequence. The receiving end detects these violations and when they appear to be part of an encoded “zero” string – it removes them. Other bipolar violations may also be caused by transmission errors. Therefore, any bipolar violations which cannot be interpreted as intentional coding violations can be separately counted, to obtain information on the quality of the transmission link.

Timeslot 0

Timeslot 0 of E1 frames is used for two main purposes:

• Delineation of frame boundaries. For this purpose, in every second frame, timeslot 0 carries a fixed pattern, called frame alignment signal (FAS). Frames carrying the FAS are defined as even frames, as they are assigned the numbers 0, 2, 4, etc. when larger structures (multiframes) are used.

The receiving equipment searches for the fixed FAS pattern in the data stream using a special algorithm, a process called frame synchronization. Once this process is successfully completed, the equipment can identify each bit in the received frames.

• Interchange of housekeeping information. In every frame without FAS (odd frames), timeslot 0 carries housekeeping information. This information is carried as follows:

Bit 1 - this bit is called the international (I) bit. Its main use is for error detection using the optional CRC-4 function (CRC-4 stands for Cyclic Redundancy Check, using a fourth-degree polynomial). This function is described below.

Bit 2 is always set to 1, a fact used by the frame alignment algorithm.

Bit 3 is used as a remote alarm indication (RAI), to notify the equipment at the other end that the local equipment lost frame alignment, or does not receive an input signal.

The other bits, identified as Sa4 through Sa8, are designated national bits, and are actually available to the users, provided agreement is reached as to their use. RAD equipment with SNMP agents can use Sa bits for carrying the inband management traffic. The total data rate that can be carried by a national bit is 4 kbps.

E1 Line Statistics Using CRC-4 Error Detection

FCD-E1L supports the CRC-4 function in accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.704. The CRC-4 function is used to detect errors in the received data, and therefore can be used to evaluate data transmission quality over E1 links. This function can be enabled or disabled by the user.

To enable error detection, additional information must be provided to the receiving equipment. The additional information is transmitted to the receiving equipment by using a multiframe structure called CRC-4 multiframes. A CRC-4 multiframe is an arbitrary group of 16 frames. This group is not related in any way to the G732S 16-frame multiframe structures explained above.

Page 128: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix C Operating Environment Installation and Operation Manual

C-4 E1 Environment FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

A CRC-4 multiframe always starts with an even frame (a frame that carries the frame alignment signal). The CRC-4 multiframe structure is identified by a six-bit CRC-4 multiframe alignment signal, which is multiplexed into bit 1 of timeslot 0 of each odd-numbered (1, 3, 5, etc.) frame of the CRC-4 multiframe (i.e., in frames 1 through 11 of the CRC-4 multiframe).

Each CRC-4 multiframe is divided into two submultiframes of 8 frames (2048 bits) each. The detection of errors is achieved by calculating a four-bit checksum on each 2048-bit block (submultiframe). The four-checksum bits calculated on a given submultiframe are multiplexed, bit by bit, in bit 1 of timeslot 0 of each even-numbered frame of the next submultiframe.

At the receiving end, the checksum is calculated again on each submultiframe and then compared against the original checksum (sent by the transmitting end in the next submultiframe). The results are reported by two bits multiplexed in bit 1 of timeslot 0 in frames 13, 15 of the CRC-4 multiframe, respectively. Errors are counted and used to prepare statistic data on transmission performance.

E1 Line Alarm Conditions

• Excessive bit error rate. The bit error rate is measured on the frame alignment signal. The alarm threshold is an error rate higher than 10-3 that persists for 4 to 5 seconds. The alarm condition is canceled when the error rate decreases below 10-4 for 4 to 5 consecutive seconds.

• Loss of frame alignment (also called loss of synchronization). This condition is declared when too many errors are detected in the frame alignment signal (FAS), e.g., when 3 or 4 FAS errors are detected in the last 5 frames. Loss of frame alignment is cleared after no FAS errors are detected in two consecutive frames. The loss of frame alignment is reported by means of the A bit (see Figure C-1).

The A bit (bit 3 in timeslot 0 of the odd frames) serves as a remote alarm indicator (RAI) notifying the other end equipment that the local equipment lost frame alignment or does not receive an input signal.

• Loss of multiframe alignment (applicable only when G732S multiframes are used). This condition is declared when too many errors are detected in the multiframe alignment signal (MAS) (same conditions as for loss of frame alignment). The loss of multiframe alignment is reported by means of the Y bit (see Figure C-1).

• Alarm indication signal (AIS). The AIS signal is an unframed “all-ones” signal, and is used to maintain line signal synchronization in case of loss of input signal, e.g., because an alarm condition occurred in the equipment that supplies the line signal.

The equipment receiving an AIS signal loses frame synchronization.

Note

Note

Page 129: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Introduction D-1

Appendix D

Supervision Terminal Commands

D.1 Introduction

This appendix provides a detailed description of the FCD-E1L supervision language.

The information appearing in this appendix assumes that the user is familiar with the FCD-E1L system and with its configuration parameters. If necessary, review Appendix C for a description of the FCD-E1L operating environment, Chapter 3 for a general description of the FCD-E1L supervision language syntax, and Chapter 1 for a functional description of the FCD-E1L system.

The commands described in this section are listed in alphabetical order (see the Command Set Index table in Chapter 3 for a complete list). The description includes the command format, usage, and options.

The following notational conventions are used:

[ ] square brackets indicate optional entry/parameter.

{ } accolades indicate required entry/parameter.

‘ ‘ single quotes delimit user entry.

<Enter> indicates the pressing of the Enter key.

<SP> indicates the pressing of the spacebar.

LL indicates an alarm code.

The screens appearing in this appendix are given for illustration purposes only, and must not be construed as providing typical parameter values. Parameter values must be selected in accordance with the specific requirements of each particular application. If necessary, contact RAD Technical Support Department.

Note

Page 130: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-2 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

D.2 Command List

BYE

Purpose

End the current Telnet session.

Syntax

BYE

Use

To end the current Telnet session, type:

BYE<Enter>

CLR ALM

Purpose

Clear the alarm buffer.

Syntax

CLR ALM /A

Use

To clear all alarms stored in the alarm buffer (including ON/OFF alarms), type:

CLR ALM/A<Enter>

CLR LOOP

Purpose

Deactivate the specified user-initiated test or loopback.

Syntax

CLR LOOP

Use

1. To deactivate all the main link loopbacks and tests, type:

CLR LOOP ML<Enter> or CLR LP ML<Enter>

To deactivate a specific main link loopback, type:

CLR LOOP LOCAL ANALOG ML<Enter> or CLR LP LOC ANA ML<Enter>

CLR LOOP REMOTE ANALOG ML<Enter> or CLR LP REM ANA ML<Enter>

CLR LOOP LOCAL DIGITAL ML<Enter> or CLR LP LOC DIG ML<Enter>

Page 131: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-3

CLR LOOP REMOTE DIGITAL ML<Enter> or CLR LP LOC DIG ML<Enter>

2. To deactivate a data channel loopback, type:

CLR LOOP LOCAL CH 1<Enter> or CLR LP LOC CH 1<Enter>

CLR LOOP LOCAL CH 2<Enter> or CLR LP LOC CH 2<Enter>

CLR LOOP REMOTE CH 1<Enter> or CLR LP REM CH 1<Enter>

CLR LOOP REMOTE CH 2<Enter> or CLR LP REM CH 2<Enter>

CLR LOOP INBAND CH 1 <Enter> or CLR LP INBAND CH 1 <Enter>

CLR LOOP BERT CH 1 <Enter> or CLR LP BERT CH 1 <Enter>

The deactivation of an inband loopback is made by repeatedly transmitting the deactivation sequence, therefore the loopback can be considered as deactivated only after approximately 2 seconds.

If no user-initiated loopback of the specified type is now performed, you will receive ERROR 052: LOOP IS NOT ACTIVE.

DATE

Purpose

Set the date for the FCD-E1L internal real-time clock. The internal clock supports dates up to December 31st, 2099.

Syntax

DATE

Use

1. To set the date, type:

DATE<Enter>

FCD-E1L displays the date entry form:

DAY = 06

MONTH = 02

YEAR = 1997

3. Change by pressing <F> to increase and <B> to decrease the displayed values. When done, press <Enter> to move to the next field.

4. To end, press <Enter> after the YEAR field.

Note

Page 132: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-4 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

DEF AGENT

Purpose

Display and modify the current SNMP agent parameters. Refer to Appendix B for additional explanations.

To enable SNMP and Telnet management, it is necessary to define all the parameters.

Syntax

DEF AGENT

Use

1. To define the SNMP agent parameters, type:

DEF AGENT<Enter>

You will see the current agent parameters, under the header OLD AGENT PARAMETERS, followed by the entry line for the first parameter, TELNET_APATHY_TIME.

2. Select the desired value by pressing <F> or <B>, then press <Enter> to display the second line. Continue until all the parameters are defined, and then press <Enter> to continue.

3. Once the next parameter is displayed, type in the new value, and then press <Enter> to end.

A typical display, as seen after all the parameters are selected, is shown below:

CURRENT AGENT PARAMETERS

IP_ADDRESS : = XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

READ COMMUNITY IS : = public

WRITE COMMUNITY IS : = private

TRAP COMMUNITY IS : = public

where X stands for the digits of the IP address.

Table D-1 lists the agent parameters, along with their range of values and instructions on how to modify them.

Page 133: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-5

Table D-1. SNMP Agent Parameters

Parameter Function Values

TELNET_APATHY_TIME Selects the time, in minutes, after which

a Telnet connection will be automatically

terminated if no incoming activity is

detected

The available values are 10MIN, 15MIN, and

20MIN.

Default: 10MIN

IP_ADDRESS Type in the IP address assigned to the

FCD-E1L SNMP agent

Use the dotted-quad format (four groups of

digits in the range of 0 through 255,

separated by periods).

Default: 999.999.999.999

SNMP READ COMMUNITY Type in the name of the SNMP

community that has read-only

authorization (the FCD-E1L SNMP agent

will accept only getRequest and

getNextRequest commands from

management stations using that

community)

Up to seven alphanumeric characters.

Default: PUBLIC

SNMP WRITE

COMMUNITY

Type in the name of the SNMP

community that has read-write

authorization (the FCD-E1L SNMP agent

will also accept setRequest commands

from management stations using that

community)

Up to seven alphanumeric characters.

Default: PRIVATE

TRAP COMMUNITY Type in the name of the SNMP

community to which the FCD-E1L SNMP

agent will send traps

Up to seven alphanumeric characters

Default: PUBLIC

DEF ALM MASK

Purpose

Display and modify the alarm masks (masked alarms are not reported).

The alarm masks permit to disable report of alarms by unused ports and to stop the generation of alarms during maintenance.

Syntax

DEF ALM MASK

Use

1. To display the alarm mask data form, type:

DEF ALM MASK<Enter>

2. You will see the first line, used to select the group of alarms to be processed. A typical display is shown below:

Page 134: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-6 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

GROUP ALL SYSTEM USER

The functions of the fields are as follows:

GROUP Selects the group of alarms to be processed:

SYSTEM System alarms

ML Main link alarms

CH1 Data channel 1 alarms

CH2 Data channel 2 alarms.

ALL Enables the masking of all alarms:

MASK All the alarms of a specific group are masked.

USER You can define the individual alarms to be masked.

NORMAL None of the alarms in the specific group is masked.

3. Move the cursor to the desired field using the spacebar, and then change using the <F> or <B> keys.

If you select MASK or NORMAL for ALL, press <Enter> to end.

If you select USER, select the desired group of alarms, and then press <Enter> to display the group of alarms to be processed. A typical display is shown below:

ALARM NUMBER & DESCRIPTION MASKED 01 REAL TIME CLOCK BATTERY FAILURE NO

The functions of the fields are as follows:

ALARM NUMBER Displays the first alarm number (code and description) in the selected group (see Chapter 5 ).

MASKED Enables the masking of the selected alarm:

YES The alarm is masked.

NO The alarm is not masked, and will be reported when generated.

4. Select the desired state for the current alarm by pressing the <F> or <B> key, and then press <Enter> to display the next alarm number. Repeat the procedure until all the alarms in the selected group have been defined. After the last alarm, you will see again the date and time, followed by the working prompt.

DEF AR

Purpose

Control the use of traps for alarms reporting.

Syntax

DEF AR

Page 135: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-7

Use

1. To define the alarm reporting and relay indications, type:

DEF AR<Enter>

FCD-E1L displays the alarm data form.

ALARM REPORT

MAJOR ON NO

2. To display an additional row, press <Enter>. A typical data form as seen after all the lines have been displayed is shown below:

ALARM REPORT

MAJOR ON YES

MAJOR OFF YES

MINOR ON YES

MINOR OFF YES

3. To change the current selections, bring the cursor to the desired field, and then press the <F> or <B> keys to display the desired mode (YES or NO). When done, press <Enter> to end.

The data form lists the alarm conditions, and the action to be taken for each alarm condition. The fields appearing on the data form are explained below.

ALARM The alarm condition:

MAJOR ON Indication provided when a major alarm condition is detected.

MAJOR OFF Indication provided when a major alarm condition disappears.

MINOR ON Indication provided when a minor alarm condition is detected.

MINOR OFF Indication provided when a minor alarm condition disappears.

REPORT YES indicates that the corresponding alarm condition is reported by means of traps sent to management stations.

DEF BERT CH 1

Purpose

Define the BERT test conditions. Refer to Table D-2 for the parameter description, allowable ranges and configuration guidelines.

Syntax

DEF BERT CH 1

Page 136: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-8 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Use

1. To define the BER test parameters for data channel, type:

DEF BERT CH 1<Enter>

The first line of the BERT parameters data form is displayed:

PATTERN ERROR_INJECTION_RATE RX_INBAND INBAND_LOOP_PATTERN 2E23-1 NO_ERR DISABLE USER CONFIG

2. If you choose USER CONFIG, the second line of the data form is displayed:

USER_PATTERN_LEN USER_ACTIVATE_PAT 1 XXXXXXX1

3. Select the length of the user activation sequence pattern in the range of 1 to 8. Then the appropriate number of binary places will be enabled for you to set as 0 or 1.

4. Press <Enter> to receive the third line of the data form.

USER_PATTERN_LEN USER_DEACTIVATE_PAT 1 XXXXXXX0

5. Select the length of the user deactivation sequence pattern similar to Step 3.

6. After making the required selections, press <Enter> to end.

Table D-2. BERT Configuration Parameters

Parameter Function Values

PATTERN Selects the test pattern

for the data channel

The available selections are the QRSS test pattern and the

following pseudo-random sequences: 511, 2047, 2E15-1,

2E23-1.

Default: 2E23-1

ERROR_INJECTION_RATE

Enables the injection of a

calibrated rate of errors in

the transmitted test

pattern

NO ERR – Disables the injection of errors.

SINGLE – Injects a single error when <I> is pressed

(see DSP BERT command).

10E-1 – Error injection at the rate 10E-1.

Default: NO ERR

RX_INBAND Enables the activation of a

remote loopback in

response to the reception

of the inband loopback

command from the

remote system

ENABLE – Inband loopback command accepted.

DISABLE – Inband loopback command ignored.

Default: DISABLE

INBAND_LOOP_ PATTERN

Selects between the

standard and user-defined

loopback pattern.

RDL LOOP – Data channel supports remote activated loop

ANSI FT1/FE1 RDL (T1.403)

USER CONFIG – Data port supports remote activated loop

on a user config pattern.

Default: RDL LOOP

Page 137: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-9

Parameter Function Values

USER_PATTERN_ LEN

Defines the length of the

user-defined activation or

deactivation sequence.

Can be selected in the range of 1 to 8. Default: 1

USER_ACTIVATE_ PAT

1- to 8-digit binary string Select 1 or 0 for each changeable binary place of the string.

USER_DEACTIVATE_PAT

1- to 8-digit binary string Select 1 or 0 for each changeable binary place of the string.

DEF CALL

Purpose

Define the call-out parameters for the FCD-E1L dial-out operation.

The specified call-out parameters are used by FCD-E1L to build the call command that is sent to the dial-out modem. The modem connected to the CONTROL DCE connector must be set up as follows (for convenience, the Hayes commands required to select the specified parameters are listed in brackets):

• Auto-answer mode (AT S0=1)

• Call set up in response to the CONNECT string (AT X0)

• No echo (AT E0)

• Verbose mode (no codes, e.g., CONNECT string instead of 0) (AT V1).

Syntax

DEF CALL

Use

1. To define the call-out parameters, type:

DEF CALL<Enter>

You will see the first page of the call-out parameters data form. A typical display is shown below.

NUM_OF_RETRIES WAIT_FOR_CONNECT DIAL_MODE ALT_NUM_NUMBER

0 60SEC TONE NO

2. Change the parameter values as follows:

Bring the cursor to the beginning of the first field to be changed by pressing the spacebar.

To change the selected field, press <F> or <B> to scroll among the available selections.

When the desired selection is displayed, press the spacebar to move to the next field.

The call-out parameters displayed on the first page of the data form, and their range of values, are explained in Table D-3.

Page 138: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-10 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

3. When done, press <Enter> to display the second page of the call-out parameters data form. A typical display is shown below.

NEW PRIMARY NUMBER [MAX 20 CHARS] =

4. Enter a new primary directory number and press <Enter>. The directory number can include up to 20 digits, including the * and the # symbols.

FCD-E1L displays the new primary directory number you have entered.

CURRENT PRIMARY DIAL COMMNAND = 'primary number'

5. Press <Enter>:

If the ALT_NUM_MODE parameter is NO (no alternate number), FCD-E1L will display the time and date, followed by the FCD-E1L prompt.

If the ALT_NUM_MODE parameter is YES, press <Enter> to see the third page of the call-out parameters data form, used to enter a new alternate directory number. A typical display is shown below.

NEW ALTERNATE NUMBER [MAX 20 CHARS] =

6. Enter a new alternate directory number and press <Enter>. The directory number can include up to 20 digits, including the * and the # symbols.

FCD-E1L displays the new alternate directory number you have entered.

CURRENT ALTERNATE DIAL COMMAND = 'alternate number'

7. After entering the desired directory number, press <Enter> to end.

Page 139: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-11

Table D-3. Call-Out Parameters

Parameter Function Values

NUM_OF_

RETRIES

This parameter is used to control the number of dialing

retries.

The NUM_OF_RETRIES parameter applies to both the

primary and the alternate numbers:

• If the call is not established after dialing the primary

directory number the specified number of times, FCD-

E1L attempts to establish the call by dialing the

alternate directory number (provided the use of an

alternate number is enabled by means of the

ALT_NUM_MODE parameter).

• If the call cannot be established within the specified

number of redialing attempts on neither of the two

directory numbers, FCD-E1L stops the call attempts.

When a new alarm report must be sent, the call

attempts are started again. The user is notified that

the call attempts failed by a message recorded in the

alarm buffer (separate messages are provided for

each directory number).

0 No redialing attempts are

made in case the call is

not established on the

first attempt.

1–8 In case the call is not

established on the first

attempt, FCD-E1L will

redial the specified

number of times.

Default: 0

WAIT_FOR_

CONNECT

This parameter specifies the time FCD-E1L will wait for

an answer after each dialing attempt.

If the called station does not answer within the specified

time, FCD-E1L disconnects. If additional call attempts are

allowed, FCD-E1L will redial immediately after

disconnecting.

The available selections are 30, 45,

or 60 seconds.

Default: 30

DIAL_MODE This parameter is used to select the dialing mode.

Select the dialing mode supported by the telephone

network.

TONE The modem is instructed to

use DTMF dialing.

PULSE The modem is instructed to

use pulse dialing.

Default: TONE

ALT_NUM_

MODE

This parameter is used to control the use of an alternate

number. The alternate number is dialed after the

specified number of call attempts on the primary number

failed.

NO No alternate number. In this

case, the FCD-E1L stops the

call attempts after the

specified number of call

attempts on the primary

number failed.

YES The use of an alternate

number is enabled.

Default: NO

Page 140: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-12 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

DEF CH 1, DEF CH 2

Purpose

Define the data channel parameters. Refer to Table D-4 for the parameter description, allowable ranges and configuration guidelines.

Syntax

DEF CH 1 or DEF CH 2

Use

1. To define the data channel parameters, type:

DEF CH 1<Enter> or DEF CH 2<Enter>

The first line of the channel parameters data form is displayed. A typical form is shown below.

SPEED FIFO_SIZE CLOCK MODE CTS CLOCK_POLARITY

1536 (KBPS) AUTO DCE ON NORMAL

2. Change the desired parameters and then press <Enter> to display the next line. If the upper channel (CH2) interface is IR-ETH, you will see the Ethernet port configuration parameters line, otherwise you will see the timeslot mapping line (Step 3 below). A typical Ethernet port configuration parameters line is shown below.

ETHERNET MODE BRIDGING

HALF TRANS

3. Change the desired parameters and then press <Enter> to display the next line. A typical form for IR-ETN/QN is shown below.

FAULT_PROPAGATION

DISABLE

4. When fault propagation is enabled, the LAN will close due to a WAN fault. Change the desired parameters and then press <Enter> to display the next line. A typical form is shown below.

MAP_MODE START_TS TS_TYPE

SEQ 01 DATA

5. When done, press <Enter>.

If in Step 3 the MAP_MODE has been set to SEQ, the FCD-E1L will display time and date, followed by the FCD-E1L prompt.

If the MAP_MODE has been set to USER, after you press <Enter> you will see the first line of the data channel timeslot map. A typical display is shown below:

Page 141: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-13

TS : NO 1 NO 2 NO 3 NO 4 NO 5 NO 6 NO 7

TYPE : DATA NC DATA DATA DATA NC NC

Use the spacebar to move between timeslots. For each timeslot, select between DATA (timeslot allocated to the data channel) and NC (not connected) by pressing <F> or <B>.

After completing the first line, press <Enter> to continue to the next line. Repeat the procedure until all the timeslots are defined. The maximum number of timeslots is 24.

6. When done, press <Enter> to end.

Table D-4. Data Channel Configuration Parameters

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

SPEED Indicates user channel

data rate (for Ethernet

LAN interface indicates

the throughput)

Multiples of the basic rate 64

kbps, or NC (not connected).

The multiples are in the range

of 1 to 24, resulting in rates

of 64, 128, 192,..., 1536 kbps,

respectively.

When the main link framing

mode is G732S, the maximum

is 30, resulting in a maximum

payload rate of 1920 kbps.

Default: NC

Select the data rate used by the equipment

connected to the data channel. The speed is

a multiple n, of the basic rate. n, in the

range of 1 through 24, actually indicates the

number of main link timeslots that are

needed to carry the data stream connected

to the channel.

FIFO_SIZE Selects the size of the

user FIFO buffer used

in the data channel

AUTO – Automatic size

selection in accordance with

the jitter that must be

tolerated at each data rate.

32, 60, 104, 144 – Buffer

size, in bits (corresponds to

FIFO lengths of ±16, ±30, ±52

and ±72 bits).

Default: AUTO

In the DCE and DTE1 clock modes, it is not

necessary to increase the FIFO size because

the buffer size is automatically set by FCD-

E1L.

If the DTE2 mode is used and the jitter

expected in a specific application is higher

than what can be tolerated when using the

automatically selected size, you can

manually select a FIFO size greater than the

AUTO size.

Page 142: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-14 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

CLOCK MODE Selects the clocking

mode of this user data

channel.

For the Ethernet

interface, only the DCE

mode is supported, and

therefore it cannot be

changed

DCE – FCD-E1L operates as a

DCE and provides transmit

and receive clocks to the

synchronous user DTE.

DTE1 – FCD-E1L supplies the

receive clock to the user

equipment and accepts the

user transmit clock.

DTE2 – FCD-E1L requires

transmit and receive clocks

from the user equipment.

Default: DCE

Select the clock mode in accordance with

the type of equipment connected to the

user data channel:

• DCE – For direct connection to a

synchronous DTE.

• DTE1 – For connection via a modem with

external clock or another equipment that

accepts a receive clock and outputs a

transmit clock.

• DTE2 – For connection via a modem or

other type of equipment (such as a

multiplexer), that provides both receive

and transmit clocks. You must select this

mode when FCD-E1L timing is to be

locked to an external clock (see CLK

MASTER), or the external clock is

intended for use as a fallback reference

(see CLK FBACK).

Note: The accuracy and stability of the external source clock must be compatible with system requirements, otherwise severe disruptions in network operation may occur.

CTS Selects the state of

the CTS line in the user

data channel (not

applicable to Ethernet

interface)

ON – CTS continuously on

=RTS – CTS line follows the

RTS line

Default: ON

Select in accordance with the desired

operation mode of the channel.

In general, you should use =RTS for

operation in the polling mode. In this case,

when the RTS line is OFF, the local FCD-E1L

channel continuously sends MARK in its main

link timeslots.

Note: When the CTS line is not active (CTS=OFF), the user data interface generates an “all-ones” signal, transmitted via the main link to the far end.

CLOCK POLARITY

Selects the polarity of

the clock signal, relative

to the data

For FCD-E1L with

Ethernet interface, this

parameter is fixed at

NORMAL.

NORMAL – Rising edge of

clock waveform appears in

the middle of the bit interval

INVERT – The falling edge of

clock waveform appears in

the middle of the bit interval

Default: NORMAL

Page 143: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-15

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

MAP MODE Selects the timeslot

allocation method used

for the data channel

USER – Free user selection of

timeslots.

SEQ – Sequential allocation of

timeslots, starting from a

user-specified slot.

Default: USER

Select the desired mode, in accordance with

system requirements.

Remember that it is necessary to assign the

number of main link timeslots equal to n,

the multiple of the basic rate that

determines the channel data rate.

Therefore, when you select the SEQ mode

and a starting timeslot, FCD-E1L attempts

to allocate the required number n of

timeslots to the channel.

Such conflicts are automatically detected

and reported by error messages. In case of

conflict, you may use the USER mode to

assign individual free timeslots to the data

channel, until the required number of

timeslot is reached.

Note: All the timeslots assigned to the data channel are always defined as data timeslots; this, however, does not preclude their use as voice channel carriers.

START_TS Selects the starting

timeslot for SEQ

timeslot allocation

Any number in the range of 1

to 24, consistent with the

desired number of user

timeslots

Default: 1

TS_TYPE

Selects the timeslot

connection state for

SEQ timeslot allocation

NC – Timeslot not connected

DATA – Timeslot is connected

and is handled as a data

timeslot

Default: NC

Note: When USER is selected in MAP MODE parameter, START_TS and TS_TYPE fields show N/A.

ETHERNET MODE

Selects the Ethernet

LAN traffic transfer

mode.

This parameter is

displayed only for

FCD-E1L with IR-ETH

interface

HALF – Half duplex operation.

FULL – Full duplex operation

(available only for UTP

versions).

Default: HALF

Page 144: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-16 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

BRIDGING Selects the Ethernet

traffic processing

mode.

This parameter is

displayed only for FCD-

E1L with IR-ETH

interface

FILTER – The internal bridge of

FCD-E1L is enabled, and filters

the traffic transferred to the

remote end.

TRANS – The internal bridge of

FCD-E1L is disabled, and the

Ethernet traffic is

transparently transferred (LAN

extender function).

Default: TRANS

FAULT PROPAGATION

When enabled, the LAN

is closed under the

following conditions:

loss of WAN signal,

local or remote sync

loss in framed mode,

or reception of AIS in

unframed mode.

DISABLE: Fault propagation is

disabled.

ENABLE: Fault propagation is

enabled.

Default: DISABLE

Note: For IR-ETH/QN only.

DEF DNLOAD ML

Purpose

Define the inband management communication parameters. Refer to Table D-5 for the parameter description, allowable ranges and configuration guidelines.

Format

DEF DNLOAD ML

Use

1. To define the inband management communication parameters for the main link, type:

DEF DNLOAD ML<Enter>

The first line of the data form is displayed. A typical line is shown below:

DNLOAD MODE NONE

2. Select the desired mode, and then press <Enter>.

If the FRAME RL or TS0/F TS mode is selected, the following line of the data form appears:

TS_NUM SPEED 1 64

3. Select the desired timeslot. The management data rate is always 64 kbps.

4. When done, press <Enter>.

Page 145: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-17

Table D-5. Download Configuration Parameters

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

DNLOAD MODE Selects the inband

transmission mode for the

selected link

NONE – Inband SNMP and Telnet traffic is

ignored and FCD-E1L does not generate

such traffic

TS0/F – Inband SNMP and Telnet traffic is

received and transmitted in timeslot 0

FRAME_RL –Inband SNMP and Telnet traffic

is received and transmitted in a dedicated,

user-selected timeslot, using frame relay

protocol

Default: NONE

TS NUM Selects the dedicated

timeslot used for the main

link.

Any number in the range of 1 through 24,

consistent with the available timeslots

Default: 1

This parameter is

displayed only when

FR mode is selected

SPEED Selects the data rate used

to transfer inband

management traffic for

the main link.

Fixed at 64 kbps. This parameter is

displayed only when

FR mode is selected.

DEF MANAGER LIST

Purpose

Define or modify the network management stations to which the SNMP agent of this FCD-E1L system will send traps. Up to five managers can be defined. Entering the IP address and corresponding subnet mask defines each network management station.

Syntax

DEF MANAGER LIST

Use

1. To define a management station, type:

DEF MANAGER LIST<Enter>

You will see the old list of managers, in the following format:

Page 146: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-18 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

OLD MANAGERS LIST PARAMETERS

MANAGER 1 IP ADDRESS IS : 000.000.000.000

MANAGER 1 SUBNET MASK IS : 000.000.000.000

MANAGER 2 IP ADDRESS IS : 000.000.000.000

MANAGER 2 SUBNET MASK IS : 000.000.000.000

MANAGER 3 IP ADDRESS IS : 000.000.000.000

MANAGER 3 SUBNET MASK IS : 000.000.000.000

MANAGER 4 IP ADDRESS IS : 000.000.000.000

MANAGER 4 SUBNET MASK IS : 000.000.000.000

MANAGER 5 IP ADDRESS IS : 000.000.000.000

MANAGER 5 SUBNET MASK IS : 000.000.000.000

After the old table, you will see the first line of the managers list data form, which is used to define the IP address of the first management station.

2. Type in the IP address of the desired management station. Use the dotted-quad format (four groups of digits in the range of 0 through 255, separated by periods).

3. After filling in the required address, press <Enter> to display the next line, and then type in the subnet mask in the dotted-quad format. The mask consists of four groups of digits in the range of 0 to 255, separated by periods. The net section must consist of “1”s.

A typical data form, as seen after both lines used to define the first management station have been filled in, is shown below:

MANAGER 1 IP ADDRESS 999.999.999.999

MANAGER 1 SUBNET MASK 999.999.999.999

4. Repeat step 3 to define the additional management stations (2 through 5). After pressing <Enter> for the subnet mask of the fifth manager, you will see the full updated list.

DEF ML

Purpose

Select the main link parameters. Refer to Table D-6 for the parameter description, allowable ranges and configuration guidelines.

Syntax

DEF ML

Use

1. To define the main link parameters, type:

DEF ML<Enter>

Page 147: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-19

You will see the main link parameters data form. A typical data form is shown below:

FRAME CODE MASK SYNC IDLE_TS_CODE INTERFACE RX_GAIN

ESF B8ZS 000 FAST FF DSU LONG

2. Select the desired parameters, and then press <Enter>.

Table D-6. Link Configuration Parameters

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

FRAME Selects the multiframing

mode for the main link

SF (D4): 12 frames per multiframe.

ESF: 24 frames per multiframe.

Default: ESF

CODE Selects the line coding

method used for zero

suppression

TRAN: Transparent (AMI) coding, no processing for zero suppression B7ZS: B7ZS coding

B8ZS: B8ZS coding

Default: B8ZS

Note: Clear channel capability is available only with B8ZS coding.

MASK Controls the link transmit

signal characteristics.

The displayed options

depend on the link

interface hardware (with

or without CSU).

For links without CSU:

1. DSX-1 operation: The following selections,

indicating the line length in feet, are available:

Length (ft) Display

0-133 000-

133-266 133-

266-399 266-

399-533 399-

533-655 533-

2. FCC68A - provides compliance with the FCC

Rule 68.308 Option A output pulse mask.

Default for links without CSU: 0-133

For links with CSU:

0 No attenuation

7.5 Attenuation of 7.5 dB relative to the

nominal transmit level

15 Attenuation of 15 dB relative to the

nominal transmit level

22.5 Attenuation of 22.5 dB relative to the

nominal transmit level

Default for links with CSU: 0

When the link does

not include a CSU, the

transmit signal mask

can be selected in

accordance with the

transmit line length,

to meet DSX-1

requirements, as

specified by AT&T CB-

119, or operation in

accordance with FCC

Rules Part 68A.

When the link

includes a CSU, the

transmit signal can be

attenuated by 7.5,

15, or 22.5 dB, to

meet the

requirements of FCC

Rules Part 68A

Page 148: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-20 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

SYNC Used to change the

frame alignment

algorithms, to reduce the

time required for the link

to return to normal

operation after the end

of a link red alarm event

62411 Complies with AT&T TR-62411 (after 10

sec.)

FAST After 1 second

Default: FAST

IDLE_TS_ CODE

Selects the code

transmitted to fill idle

(unused) time slots in the

main link frame.

The following bit sequences are generally used

(represented as hexadecimal numbers): 7F, 98,

FF. You can also select any other sequence.

Default: 00

INTERFACE Determines units

displayed in MASK field.

DSU – Parameters in MASK field are dispayed

in feet.

CSU – Parameters displayed in MASK field are

displayed in dB Attenuation.

Default: DSU

RX GAIN Determines the maximum

attenuation of the

receive signal that can be

compensated for by the

main link receive path, to

obtain the BER

performance required by

the standards

LONG – Maximum attenuation of 36 dB

SHORT – Maximum attenuation of 10 dB

Default: LONG

The lower attenuation

available with the

SHORT value may

actually improve the

performance when

operating over

relatively short line

sections, especially

when operating over

multi-pair cables. In

such cables,

significant

interference is

generated by the

signals carried by

other pairs and

therefore, a weak

desired signal may be

masked by the

interference.

DEF NAME

Purpose

Define the node name (up to eight alphanumeric characters).

Syntax

DEF NAME

Use

Page 149: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-21

1. To define the FCD-E1L node name, type:

DEF NAME<Enter>

FCD-E1L displays the current name in the following format:

OLD NAME = ‘old name’

where ‘old name’ is the name FCD-E1L is currently assigned.

The current name is followed by the name entry form:

ENTER NODE NAME (MAX 8 CHARACTERS) =

2. Type the desired name, and then press <Enter>. The new name is displayed in the following format:

CURRENT NAME = 'name'

where ‘name’ is the FCD-E1L current node name.

DEF NODE

Purpose

Define the FCD-E1L node number, or address. The allowed range is 0 to 255. Use this command to manage several devices connected over a multidrop management cable. By default, all devices are set to NODE 0 unless changed by the user.

Syntax

DEF NODE

Use

1. To define the FCD-E1L node number, type:

DEF NODE<Enter>

FCD-E1L displays the node entry form:

NODE (0 to 255) =

2. Type the desired number in the range of 0 to 255, and then press <Enter>.

After configuring a new node address, typing will not appear on the screen until the device is first identified by node number.

3. To communicate with a device after a new node number was set, blind type:

NODE<SP>’number’<SP><Enter>

where ‘number’ is the node number of the desired device.

DEF PROMPT

Purpose

Select the supervisory port prompt.

Page 150: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-22 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Syntax

DEF PROMPT

Use

1. To select the supervisory port prompt, type:

DEF PROMPT <Enter>

The prompt selection form is displayed. A typical dorm is shown below:

PROMPT_TYPE

PRODUCT_NAME

2. To change the current selection, press <F> or <B>, then press <Enter> to end.

The available selections are as follows:

PRODUCT_NAME The prompt displays the equipment type, FCD, followed by >.

GIVEN_NAME The prompt consists of the logical name assigned by means of the DEF NAME command, followed by >.

DEF PWD

Purpose

Define a new user password for FCD-E1L.

Syntax

DEF PWD

Use

1. To define a new user password, type:

DEF PWD<Enter>

The current password entry screen appears:

OLD PASSWORD = ‘old password’

where ‘old password’ is the current password. The current password is followed by the password entry form:

NEW PASSWORD [4 TO 6 CHARS] =

2. Type the required password (4 to 6 characters). Carefully check that the specified password has been indeed typed in, and then press <Enter>. The new password is displayed in the following format:

CURRENT PASSWORD = ‘password’

Page 151: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-23

Before entering a new password, make sure that the PASSWORD section of the FCD-E1L internal switch S1 is not set to ON, because in such case the default password (RAD) is enforced.

DEF ROUTE

Purpose

Define the network management stations to be statically routed via the supervisory port. Up to five stations can be defined. The data is sent to the defined stations via the supervisory port regardless whether the station was predefined in the FCD-E1L network database or not.

Syntax

DEF ROUTE

Use

The use and the display format are similar to the DEF MANAGER LIST command.

The typical display is shown below:

ROUTE IP ADDRESS 1 IS: = 000.000.000.000 ROUTE IP ADDRESS 2 IS: = 000.000.000.000 ROUTE IP ADDRESS 3 IS: = 000.000.000.000 ROUTE IP ADDRESS 4 IS: = 000.000.000.000 ROUTE IP ADDRESS 5 IS: = 000.000.000.000

DEF SP

Purpose

Define the supervisory (CONTROL DCE) port parameters. Refer to Table D-7 for the parameter description, allowable ranges and configuration guidelines.

Syntax

DEF SP

Use

1. To define the supervisory port parameters, type:

DEF SP<Enter>

The first line of the supervisory port parameters data form is displayed. A typical form is shown below. The form presents the current parameter values as defaults.

SPEED DATA PARITY INTERFACE CTS DCD_DEL DSR

AUTO 8 NONE DCE =RTS 0_MSEC ON

Note

Page 152: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-24 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

2. Change the parameter values by bringing the cursor to the beginning of the first field to be changed using the spacebar, and then press <F> or <B> to scroll among the available selections. When the desired selection is displayed, press the spacebar to move to the next field.

3. When done, press <Enter> to display the second line of the supervisory port parameters data form. A typical display is shown below.

POP_ALM PWD LOG_OFF CALL_OUT_TRIGER ACTIVATE_CALL_OUT AUXILIARY_DEVICE NO NO NO NONE ANY CASE TERMINAL

4. After the desired parameter values are selected, press <Enter> to end, and then press <Enter> to reconnect to FCD-E1L.

Table D-7. Supervisory Port Configuration Parameters

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

SPEED Selects supervisory

port data rate.

300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 –

Supervisory port data rates in bps

AUTO – Autobaud operation.

Default: AUTO

Select AUTO in order for FCD-

E1L to automatically identify the

incoming traffic data rate.

To enable positive

identification, the transmission

must start with three

consecutive Enters.

Do not use Autobaud when the

CONTROL DCE port is configured

for the SLIP or PPP protocol.

DATA Selects the number

of data bits in the

CONTROL DCE port

word format

7, 8 – Number of data bits

Default: 8

The supervisory port word

format should be the same as

on the terminal.

PARITY Controls the use of

parity

ODD – Odd parity

EVEN – Even parity

NONE – Parity disabled

Default: NONE

The supervisory port word

format should be the same as

on the terminal.

INTERFACE Selects supervisory

port interface

DCE – The CONTROL DCE port appears as a

DCE for external equipment

DTE – The CONTROL DCE port appears as a

DTE, for connection via modem to the

external equipment

Default: DCE

Select DCE when FCD-E1L is

connected directly to the

terminal.

Select DTE when FCD-E1L is

connected to the terminal via a

modem.

CTS Controls the state

of the CTS line in

the CONTROL DCE

port

ON – The CTS line is always ON (active).

=RTS – The CTS line follows the RTS line.

Default: =RTS

Page 153: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-25

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

DCD_DEL With the CONTROL

DCE port defined as

DTE, indicates the

delay (in msec)

between DCD=ON

and sending of data

The available values are 0, 10, 50, 100, 200,

and 300 msec. If you select a non-zero

value when the port interface is

programmed as DCE, you will receive an

error message.

Default: 0

DSR Controls the state

of the DSR line

ON – The DSR line is continuously on. It will

switch to OFF for five seconds

after the DTR line is switched OFF.

If you select DSR=ON when

INT=DTE, you will receive an error

message.

=DTR – The DSR line tracks the DTR line.

Default: ON

POP_ALM Controls the

automatic sending

of alarms to a

terminal connected

to the CONTROL

DCE port

YES – The terminal automatically displays

every 10 minutes the alarm status (or

whenever an alarm which is not

masked using the DEF ALM MASK

command changes to ON).

NO – The automatic display feature is

disabled.

Default: NO

PWD Controls password

protection

YES – Password protection enabled.

NO – Password protection disabled.

Default: NO

LOG_OFF Controls the idle

disconnect time of

the CONTROL DCE

port

NO – Automatic session disconnection

disabled. To disconnect the session, use

the BYE command.

3_MIN – Automatic disconnection after

3 minutes if no input data is received by

the CONTROL DCE port.

10_MIN – Automatic disconnection after

10 minutes if no input data is received by

the CONTROL DCE port.

Default: NO

CALL_OUT_ TRIGGER

Controls the use of

the call-out trigger NONE – The call-out function is disabled

ALL – FCD-E1L will initiate a call after each

new alarm

MAJOR – FCD-E1L will initiate a call only

when a new major alarm condition is

detected.

Default: NONE

Page 154: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-26 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Parameter Function Values Configuration Guidelines

ACTIVATE_ CALL_OUT

If CALL_OUT_ TRIGGER is not set

to NONE, defines

when the call-out

function is

activated

ANY CASE – Call-out is activated in any

case.

LINK FAIL – Call-out is activated only when

a link failure occurs or there is local or

remote synchronization loss.

Default: ANY CASE

AUXILIARY_DEVICE

Selects the

management mode

supported by the

CONTROL DCE

port.

TERMINAL The CONTROL port supports

only management by means

of a supervision terminal.

NMS SLIP The CONTROL port connects

to an SNMP management

station and/or Telnet host,

using the SLIP protocol.

AGENT SLIP The CONTROL port is

connected to another agent

port using the SLIP protocol.

NMS PPP Same as NMS SLIP, except

that the PPP protocol is used.

Select SLIP-NMS when the

supervisory port must be able

to use the SLIP protocol, for

example SNMP or Telnet

management.

Select TERMINAL if only the

supervision terminal must be

supported.

DEF SYS

Purpose

Define the system parameters. Refer to Table D-8 for the parameter description, allowable ranges and configuration guidelines.

Syntax

DEF SYS

Use

To define the FCD-E1L system parameters, type:

DEF SYS<Enter>

The system parameters data form is displayed. A typical form is shown below. The form presents the current parameter values as defaults.

CLK_MASTER CLK_FBACK DATE_FORMAT LEARNING_MODE

ML NONE YYYY-MM-DD ENABLE

After the desired parameter values are selected, press <Enter> to end.

Page 155: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-27

Table D-8. System Configuration Parameters

Designation Function Values Configuration Guidelines

CLK_MASTER Selects the master

system timing

reference.

INT – Internal oscillator.

ML – Locked to the recovered

main link receive clock

CH1 – Locked to the external

clock supplied to the user data

channel 1, provided the channel

timing mode is DTE2

CH2 – Locked to the external

clock supplied to the user data

channel 2, provided the channel

timing mode is DTE2

Default: ML

Select ML for connection to

carrier lines.

Select CH1 for connection to

a data network.

Select INT at one end and

ML at the other end for

point-to-point lines.

CLK_FBACK Selects the alternate

(fallback) system

timing reference, for

use in case the

master reference

fails.

NONE – No fallback source is

used. In this case, the internal

oscillator is automatically selected

when the master reference fails

ML – Locked to the recovered

main link receive clock

CH1 – Locked to the external

clock supplied to the user data

channel 1, provided the channel

timing mode is DTE2

CH2 – Locked to the external

clock supplied to the user data

channel 2, provided the channel

timing mode is DTE2

N/A – Appears when the internal

oscillator has been selected as

master reference, and therefore

fallback source is not relevant.

Default: NONE

Select a source different

from that selected as

master.

Select NONE to disable

switching to the fallback

source. In this case, the

default fallback clock source

is the FCD-E1L internal clock

oscillator.

DATE_FORMAT Selects the date

display format

The available selections are

DD/MM/YYYY, MM/DD/YYYY, and

YYYY-MM-DD.

Default: YYYY-MM-DD

LEARNING_MODE Enables automatic

setup of T1

parameters and

timeslot assignment

ENABLE – T1 learning mode is

enabled

DISABLE – T1 learning mode is

disabled

Default: ENABLE

Page 156: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-28 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

DEF TERM

Purpose

Define the control codes for use with one of the following types of terminals: TV920, VT52, VT100, Freedom 100/110 or Freedom 220, or reset the codes to 0.

If you are using a different type of terminal, use the F command to define the desired codes.

The codes used by the above-mentioned terminals are listed in Table D-9.

Table D-9. Supervision Terminal Control Codes

Function Terminal Type

TV920 VT52 VT100 Freedom 100/110 Freedom 220

Clear Screen 1B2A0000 N/A 1B5B324A 1B2A0000 1B5B324A

Cursor Home 1E000000 1B480000 1B5B4800 1E000000 1B5B4800

Cursor Right 0C000000 1B424000 1B5B3143 0C000000 1B5B0143

Syntax

DEF TERM {‘terminal type’}

Use

1. To reset the terminal control codes to 0, type:

DEF TERM<Enter>

2. To select the control codes for one of the above-mentioned types, type:

DEF TERM ‘terminal type’<Enter>

where ‘terminal type’ stands for TV920, VT52, VT100, Freedom100, or Freedom220.

3. Press <Enter> again to end.

DSP AGENT

Purpose

Display the FCD-E1L agent parameters.

Syntax

DSP AGENT

Use

To display the agent parameters, type:

DSP AGENT<Enter>

Page 157: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-29

You will see the SNMP parameters data form. A typical form is shown below:

AGENT PARAMETERS

AGENT NAME :

IP ADDRESS IS : = XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Refer to the DEF AGENT section for an explanation of the information displayed by this command.

DSP ALM

Purpose

Display the contents of the alarm buffer. This buffer can contain up to 100 alarms.

Syntax

DSP ALM [Option]

Use

1. To display the complete contents of the buffer, type: DSP ALM<Enter>

2. To display the complete buffer contents and then clear all the alarms, type: DSP ALM /CA<Enter>

The contents of the alarm buffer are displayed as a table with four columns. The columns include the alarm code, alarm description, the link on which the alarm condition has been detected, alarm status, date and time of occurrence.

A header precedes each block of alarms received from an FCD-E1L. The header lists the node number and the assigned node name, and it serves as an easily identified separator between the alarms transmitted by different FCD-E1L units.

The alarm messages that can be displayed by the terminal are explained in Chapter 5.

DSP BERT CH 1

Purpose

Display the results of an on-going bit error ratio measurement on the data channel. When monitoring the BERT results, you may also start and stop error injection, and restart the error count by clearing the accumulated error results.

Monitoring is not possible when using Telnet.

The error injection rate is defined by means of the DEF BERT CH 1 command.

Note

Page 158: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-30 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Syntax

DSP BERT CH 1

Use

1. To display the current results of the BER test on the data channel, type:

DSP BERT CH 1<Enter>

2. To display the current results of the BER test and then reset the error count, type:

DSP BERT CH 1 /C<Enter>

3. To monitor the results of the BERT test, type:

DSP BERT CH 1 /R<Enter>

In this case, you will see the commands you can use while monitoring the BER test results, and then the results themselves.

PRESS I FOR ERRORS INJECT

PRESS S FOR STOP ERRORS INJECT

PRESS C TO CLEAR ERROR BITS

When using the single-error mode, pressing I injects a single error. To inject an additional error, first press S before pressing I.

To stop the monitoring and obtain again the command prompt, press <CTRL+C> (BREAK).

When using Telnet, it is not possible to monitor the results. Therefore, use the following command to display the results and start the injection of errors:

DSP BERT CH 1 /I<Enter>

and the command

DSP BERT CH 1 /S<Enter>

to display the results and then stop the injection of errors.

The BER test results displayed on the screen are correct for the instant the display command has been issued (or since the last time the counters have been cleared, whichever occurred last). When the /R option is used, the results are periodically updated. The results are presented in the following format:

BERT OF CHANNEL - 1

ERROR_BITS RUN_TIME(SEC) ERRORS(SEC) SYNC_LOSS(SEC) ERROR_INJECT

0 100 0 0 OFF

The display fields are as follows:

Note

Page 159: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-31

ERROR_BITS Total number of bit errors detected.

RUN_TIME(SEC) Total time the test is running.

ERRORS(SEC) Total number of seconds in which errors have been detected.

SYNC LOSS(SEC) Total number of seconds in which loss of frame alignment occurred.

ERROR INJECT(SEC) Indicates whether errors are injected (ON) or not (OFF).

All the counters have a range of 0 through 65535. When the maximum value is reached, the counter freezes, therefore in general a value of 65535 indicates the counter has overflown.

DSP HDR TST

Purpose

Display the results of the last hardware test (made during power-on self-test and during regular operation).

Syntax

DSP HDR TST

Use

To display the hardware test report, type:

DSP HDR TST<Enter>

Display Format

The display has one field that shows NO ERROR if everything checks well, or lists the detected problem: EPROM FAILURE, I/O EXP FAILURE, COUNTER FAILURE, ILLEGL SYS CNFG or SFIFO FAIL.

DSP MANAGER LIST

Purpose

Display the network management stations to which the SNMP agent of this FCD-E1L system sends traps. The information that is provided for each network management station includes its IP address and the corresponding subnet mask.

Syntax

DSP MANAGER LIST

Note

Page 160: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-32 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Use

To display the current list of network management stations, type:

DSP MANAGER LIST<Enter>

You will see the list of network management stations that receive traps generated by this FCD-E1L system. A typical display is shown below:

MANAGERS LIST PARAMETERS

MANAGER 1 IP ADDRESS IS := XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

MANAGER 1 SUBNET MASK IS : XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

MANAGER 2 IP ADDRESS IS : XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

MANAGER 2 SUBNET MASK IS : XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

MANAGER 3 IP ADDRESS IS : XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

MANAGER 3 SUBNET MASK IS : XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

MANAGER 4 IP ADDRESS IS : XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

MANAGER 4 SUBNET MASK IS : XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

MANAGER 5 IP ADDRESS IS : XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

MANAGER 5 SUBNET MASK IS : XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

DSP PM ML

Purpose

Display the contents of the performance monitoring registers specified by AT&T Pub. 54016. For an explanation of the performance monitoring registers, refer to the Performance Diagnostic Data section in Chapter 5.

Syntax

DSP PM ML [/C] [/CA]

Use

1. To display the main link performance monitoring registers, type:

DSP PM ML<Enter>

2. To display the performance monitoring registers, and then clear only the event register, type:

DSP PM ML /C<Enter>

3. To display the performance monitoring registers, clear all the performance monitoring registers of the main link, and restart the count intervals, type:

DSP PM ML /CA<Enter>

The performance monitoring registers are listed in the following order (the numbers in brackets indicate the range of values for each register):

Page 161: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-33

PM OF – MAIN LINK

ESF ERROR EVENTS = [0]..... [65535]

CURRENT ES = [0]..... [900]

CURRENT UAS = [0]..... [900]

CURRENT SES = [0]..... [900]

CURRENT BES = [0]..... [900]

CURRENT LES [0]..... [900]

CURRENT SEFS [0]..... [900]

CURRENT LOFC = [0]..... [255]

CURRENT CSS = [0]..... [255]

CURRENT DM

CURRENT TIMER = [0]..... [900]

INTERVAL mm ES=nnn UAS=nnn BES=nnn LES=nnn SEFS=nnn SES=nnn LOFC=nnn CSS=nnn DM=nnn

24 HOUR ES = [0]..... [65535]

24 HOUR UAS = [0]..... [65535]

24 HOUR SES = [0]..... [65535]

24 HOUR BES = [0]..... [65535]

24 HOUR LES [0]..... [65535]

24 HOUR SEFS [0]..... [65535]

24 HOUR LOFC = [0]..... [255]

24 HOUR CSS = [0]..... [255]

24 DEGRADE MIN = [0]..... [1440]

LAST 24 DEGRADE MIN = [0]..... [1440]

24 INTERVAL = [0]..... [96]

where mm is 0 to 96, and nnn is 0 to 900.

DSP REM AGENT

Purpose

Display information on the remote SNMP agents that are known to the FCD-E1L IP router, provided SNMP management is enabled.

Syntax

DSP REM AGENT

Page 162: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-34 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Use

1. To display the remote agent information, type:

DSP REM AGENT<Enter>

A typical table listing the remote agents is shown below:

IP ADDRESS MUX NAME DISTANCE

01) 192.114.050.002 New-York 013

02) 192.114.150.122 Chicago 009

The fields displayed for each agent are as follows:

IP ADDRESS The IP address of the remote agent.

MUX NAME The logical name of the remote agent.

DISTANCE Metric that indicates the logical distance (through the management network) to the remote agent, and is used, among other factors, in the selection of the optimal route to be used by the management traffic.

2. To display the remote agent information including management stations that are connected to FCD-E1L, type:

DSP REM AGENT /A<Enter>

You will see a table listing the remote agents. A typical table is shown below:

IP ADDRESS MUX NAME DISTANCE

01) 192.114.029.209 ** NMS ** 030

02) 192.168.238.196 ** NMS ** 030

03) 192.168.238.244 ** NMS ** 030

04) 192.114.027.036 ** NMS ** 030

05) 192.168.238.061 ** NMS ** 030

06) 192.168.238.001 ** NMS ** 030

07) 192.168.200.253 ** NMS ** 030

08) 192.168.238.203 fcd245 006

DSP ST CH

Purpose

Display status information on the data channel.

Syntax

DSP ST CH X (X=1 or 2)

Page 163: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-35

Use

To display the data channel status information, type:

DSP ST CH X<Enter>

A typical channel status display is shown below:

STATUS OF CHANNEL – X

LOOPS TYPE = LOCAL REMOTE BERT T_INBAND R_INBAND

NO NO NO NO NO

PORT STATE = NOT CONNECTED

RTS/CONTROL STATE = OFF

INTERFACE = V.35

The fields included in the status information display are listed below:

LOOPS Displays the current state of the loops and tests on the data channel.

The LOCAL field indicates the local loopback state:

• NO – local loopback is deactivated.

• YES – local loopback is activated.

The REMOTE field indicates the remote loopback state:

• NO – remote loopback is deactivated.

• YES – remote loopback is activated.

The BERT field indicates the BER test state:

• NO – BER test is deactivated.

• YES – BER test is activated.

T_INBAND This field displays YES to indicate that the user requested the sending of the inband remote loopback activation sequence.

R_INBAND This field displays YES when a loopback has been connected as a result of the reception of the inband remote loopback activation sequence.

PORT STATE Displays whether the data channel is connected to the main link:

• CONNECTED – the channel is connected.

• NOT CONNECTED – the channel is not connected.

RTS STATE Displays the RTS line state in the channel connector:

• OFF – the RTS line is not active.

• ON – the RTS line is active.

INTERFACE Displays the interface type:

• V.35 – V.35 interface

• X.21 – X.21 interface

Page 164: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-36 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

• RS-232 – V.24/RS-232 interface

• RS-530 – RS-530 interface or V.36/RS-449 via an adaptor cable

• 10baseT – Ethernet 10BaseT bridge

• 10/100BaseT – Ethernet 10/100BaseT bridge with VLAN support

• IP ROUTER – Ethernet 10BaseT IP router

DSP ST ML

Purpose

Display main link status information.

Syntax

DSP ST ML [/C]

Use

1. To display the main link status information, type:

DSP ST ML<Enter>

2. To display the main link status information, and then clear its error event registers, type:

DSP ST ML /C<Enter>

A typical main link status display follows:

STATUS OF - MAIN LINK

TYPE = T1

FUNCTION = COPPER UNBALANCE

ALARMS RED ===

YELLOW ======

OFF OFF

LOOPS DIGITAL ANALOG

LOCAL =====

REMOTE ======

LOCAL =====

REMOTE ======

PLB ===

LLB ===

NO NO NO NO NO NO

DNLOAD MODE = NONE

OOS CNTR = 0

The fields included in the status information displays are listed below:

TYPE Indicates the main link interface, T1.

INTERFACE Indicates the main link interface type: COPPER LTU or COPPER DSU, balanced or unbalanced

Page 165: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-37

ALARMS Indicates the state of the port alarms:

• RED - state of local frame synchronization.

• YELLOW - state of remote frame synchronization.

LOOPS Indicates the state of loops that can be activated on the main link:

• User-activated: local and remote loopbacks.

• Analog or digital.

DNLOAD MODE Displays the inband management mode selected for the main link: TS0/F, FRAME RL

OOS CNTR Displays the number of local loss of frame alignment events detected since the last time the counters were cleared.

DSP ST SYS

Purpose

Display system status information.

Syntax

DSP ST SYS

Use

To view the system status, type:

DSP ST SYS<Enter>

A typical system status display is shown below.

NODE = ‘node number’

NAME = ‘FCD-E1L name’

NODAL CLOCK = INT

SOFTWARE VER = 01.00

HARDWARE VER = 00.02

FCD TYPE = T1/1

POWER SUPPLY = DC

The fields included in the system status information displays are listed below:

NODE The node number (0 through 255) assigned to the FCD-E1L.

NAME The system name assigned to the FCD-E1L.

NODAL CLOCK Indicates the nodal clock source: INT, CH1, CH2 or ML.

SOFTWARE VER The software version of the FCD-E1L.

HARDWARE VER The hardware version of the FCD-E1L.

Page 166: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-38 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

FCD TYPE Indicates the type and number of data channels of the FCD device

DSP TS

Purpose

Display information on the use and type of main link timeslots.

Syntax

DSP TS

Use

To display the timeslot information, type:

DSP TS<Enter>

A typical display is shown below:

TS : 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

TYPE : DATA NC DATA DATA DATA NC DEDIC DATA DATA NC

DEST : CH1 NA CH2 NA NA NA ML CH1 NA NA

TS : 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

TYPE : DATA NC DATA DATA DATA DATA NC DATA DATA NC

DEST : CH1 NA CH1 NA NA NA NA CH2 NA NA

TS : 21 22 23 24

TYPE : DATA NC DATA DATA

DEST : CH1 NA NA CH2

The fields included in the timeslot displays are listed below:

TS Indicates the main link timeslot number, 1 through 24.

TYPE Indicates the timeslot type:

• NA - timeslot not connected (FCD-E1L inserts the idle code in such timeslots).

• DATA - data channel.

• DEDIC - timeslot dedicated to management traffic.

DEST Indicates the port (or channel) using that timeslot.

• ML - main link.

• CH1 - data channel 1

Page 167: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-39

• CH2 - data channel 2.

EXIT

Purpose

End the current communication session.

Syntax

EXIT

Use

To end the current communication session, type:

EXIT<Enter>

F

Purpose

Define the codes used to be sent to the supervision terminal to perform the following terminal control functions:

• Clear screen.

• Move cursor to screen home position.

• Move cursor to the right by one position.

If you have a TV920, VT52, VT100, Freedom 100 or Freedom 220 terminal, you can use the DEF TERM command to set the control codes for that terminal.

Syntax

F

Use

1. To display the current codes, type:

F<Enter>

The terminal function entry screen is displayed. The screen includes three separate lines, displayed one after the other. A typical screen, showing all the three lines, is shown below:

CLEAR SCREEN =hhhhhhhh

CURSOR HOME =hhhhhhhh

CURSOR RIGHT =hhhhhhhh

where h indicates hexadecimal digits.

2. To change a code, enter the appropriate hexadecimal digit under the first digit of the code, the cursor advances to the next digit.

Page 168: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-40 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

3. Repeat the procedure until all the necessary digits are changed, and then press <Enter> to end.

HELP

Purpose

Display an index of the supervision terminal commands used in the explicit mode, and the options available for each command.

Syntax

HELP

Use

Type:

HELP<Enter>

You will see the first HELP page. Press the spacebar to see the next page.

INIT DB

Purpose

Load the default parameter values in Table D-10 instead of user’s configuration.

Syntax

INIT DB

Use

To load the default parameters, type:

INIT DB<Enter>

FCD-E1L displays the following message:

FCD Supervisory Port On Line. Type 'H' for help

and then the time and date fields followed by the FCD-E1L prompt.

Page 169: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-41

Table D-10. FCD-E1L Default Configuration Used with Supervision Terminal

Type Parameter Designation Default Value

General PASSWORD

NODE (node number)

CLEAR SCREEN

CURSOR HOME

CURSOR right

RAD

0

00 00 00 00

00 00 00 00

00 00 00 00

System CLK_MASTER

CLK_FBACK

DATE_FORMAT

LEARNING_MODE

ML

NONE

YYYY-MM-DD

ENABLED

Main Link FRAME

CODE

SYNC

IDLE_TS_CODE

RX_GAIN

MASK

INTERFACE

RAI

ESF

B8ZS

FAST

00

LONG

00 00 00 00

DSU

N/A

Download Parameters MODE

TS NUM

SPEED

NONE

N/A

N/A

Data/Ethernet

Channels

SPEED

MAP_MODE

START_TS

TS TYPE

FIFO_SIZE

CLOCK_MODE

CTS

ETHERNET MODE (for IR-ETH

only)

BRIDGING (for IR-ETH only)

CLOCK_POLARITY

TIMESLOT MAP

DEST

TYPE

NC

USER

N/A

N/A

AUTO

DCE

ON

HALF

TRANS

NORMAL

NONE

NC

BERT Parameters BERT_PATTERN

ERROR_INJECTION_RATE

RX_INBAND

INBAND_LOOP_PATTERN

2E23-1

NO_ERR

DISABLE

RDL LOOP

Page 170: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-42 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Type Parameter Designation Default Value

SP (Supervisory Port) SPEED

DATA

PARITY

INTERFACE

CTS

DCD_DEL

DSR

PWD

POP_ALM

LOG_OFF

CALL_OUT_TRIGGER

ACTIVATE_CALL_OUT

AUXILIARY_DEVICE

AUTO

8

NONE

DCE

=RTS

0_MSEC

ON

NO

NO

NO

NONE

ANY CASE

TERMINAL

LEARN

Purpose

Activate the T1 learning process. Upon sending this command, the unit automatically detects the T1 parameters of the link it is connected to and performs autoconfiguration accordingly.

Syntax

LEARN

Use

To activate the T1 learning process, type:

LEARN<Enter>

For a few seconds, the terminal displays the following message:

LEARNING T1 PARAMETERS, PLEASE WAIT…

Once FCD-E1L has detected the framing and mode of the T1 link, it displays the results in the following form:

SETTING RX GAIN TO: LONG

FRAME = ESF, LINE CODING <ASSUMED> = B8ZS

If FCD-E1L has a single data channel installed, then, following another small delay, FCD-E1L detects the data carrying timeslots and displays the result in the following form:

Page 171: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-43

DATA TIME SLOTS: 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 21, 22, 23, 24

If FCD-E1L has two data channels installed, the timeslot learning is not available.

At last, FCD-E1L displays the following:

T1 LEARNING FINISHED SUCCESSFULLY

In parallel, the state of the learning process is indicated by the AUTO CONFIGURATION LED on the front panel (see Appendix E).

LOOP

Purpose

Activate the specified user-initiated test or loopback.

Note that a remote loopback cannot be activated when a local loopback is already connected, and vice versa (in such case, you will see ERROR 051 - illegal port loop combination).

Syntax

LOOP {‘loopback’}

Use

1. To activate a main link loopback, type:

LOOP LOCAL ANALOG ML<Enter> or LP LOC ANA ML<Enter> LOOP REMOTE ANALOG ML<Enter> or LP REM ANA ML<Enter>

LOOP LOCAL DIGITAL ML<Enter> or LP LOC DIG ML<Enter> LOOP REMOTE DIGITAL ML<Enter> or LP REM DIG ML<Enter>

2. To activate a channel loopback or test, type:

LOOP LOCAL CH 1<Enter> or LP LOC CH 1<Enter> LOOP LOCAL CH 2<Enter> or LP LOC CH 2<Enter> LOOP REMOTE CH 1<Enter> or LP REM CH 1<Enter> LOOP REMOTE CH 2<Enter> or LP REM CH 2<Enter>

LOOP BERT CH 1<Enter> or LP BERT CH 1<Enter> LOOP INBAND CH 1<Enter> or LP INBAND CH 1<Enter>

Note

Note

Page 172: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-44 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

• Inband loopback and BER testing are available on channel 1 only.

• The activation of an inband loopback is made by repeatedly transmitting the activation sequence, therefore the loopback can be considered as activated only after approximately 2 seconds.

If the requested loopback is already active, you will receive ERROR 053: CURRENT LOOP ALREADY BEING PERFORMED.

If the requested loopback is not supported by the FCD-E1L version, you will receive ERROR 055: LOOP NOT SUPPORTED ON CURRENT FCD TYPE.

If you are trying to activate a loopback on a data channel of an FCD-E1L with Ethernet interface, you will see ERROR 056: ILLEGAL COMMAND FOR CURRENT PORT MODE. Nevertheless, the BERT test (LOOP BERT) is allowed.

PASSWORD

Purpose

Enter the password when prompted to type the password upon the start of a control session.

Syntax

‘password’

Use

When you see the prompt PASSWORD>, type:

‘password’<Enter>

where ‘password’ is the string of four to eight alphanumeric characters that has been defined by the user (or the default, RAD, as appropriate).

If you entered the correct password, you will see the FCD-E1L working prompt, FCD>.

RESET

Purpose

Reset the FCD-E1L system.

Syntax

RESET

Use

To reset the FCD-E1L, type:

RESET<Enter>

You are requested to confirm the operation.

Notes

Page 173: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Command List D-45

This command works only when the WD jumper JP15 is set to ON (see the Installation and Setup chapter for details).

TIME

Purpose

Set the time for the FCD-E1L internal clock.

Syntax

TIME

Use

1. To set the FCD-E1L internal clock time, type:

TIME<Enter>

FCD-E1L sends the time entry form:

HOUR = 12

MINUTE = 25

SECOND = 16

2. Bring the cursor to the first field to be changed by pressing <Enter> and use <F> or <B> to change the digits.

3. Set the time about one minute beyond the current time, and then press <Enter> at the correct instant.

FCD-E1L will display the time and date fields (note that time has changed), followed by the FCD-E1L prompt.

Note

Page 174: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix D Supervision Terminal Commands Installation and Operation Manual

D-46 Command List FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Page 175: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Introduction E-1

Appendix E

E1 Learning

This appendix describes the E1 learning, or autoconfiguration feature of the FCD-E1L.

E.1 Introduction

For ease of installation, FCD-E1L features plug-and-play connectivity. Upon connection to the E1 link, FCD-E1L automatically detects the E1 parameters and performs autoconfiguration accordingly. This automatic setup of E1 parameters and timeslot assignment is called the E1 learning.

When the learning process is activated, FCD-E1L successively configures the E1 link interface operating mode (LTU or DSU), the framing mode (G.732S, G732N or unframed) and the CRC (ON or OFF). In the single data channel version, FCD-E1L then checks and displays the data carrying timeslots. In the dual-channel version, this feature is not available.

Any time FCD-E1L detects a sync or signal loss on the E1 link, the process is interrupted and FCD-E1L announces that the process has failed.

The E1 learning process can be activated via the AUTO CONFIGURATION button on the FCD-E1L front panel or via a terminal command.

In the first case, the state of the learning process is indicated by a dedicated AUTO CONFIGURATION LED. The idle code should then be set on the DIP switch S2 accessed from the bottom of the unit (see Chapter 2).

In the second case, the learning process is activated by the terminal command LEARN (see Appendix D). The idle code is automatically read from the value set on the main link by means of the DEF ML command. The state of the learning process is indicated both by the AUTO CONFIGURATION LED and by the message displayed on the supervision terminal.

In both cases, it is possible to disable the E1 learning mechanism. This is done via the terminal command DEF SYS (see Appendix D). By default, the E1 learning mechanism is enabled.

The learning process cannot be activated when inband management is activated.

For controlling the learning process from the terminal, refer to the LEARN command in Appendix D). Controlling the process from the FCD-E1L front panel is described in the section below.

Note

Page 176: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix E E1 Learning Installation and Operation Manual

E-2 Controlling E1 Learning from the Front Panel FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

E.2 Controlling E1 Learning from the Front Panel

To activate the E1 learning, press the AUTO CONFIGURATION button for two seconds.

The AUTO CONFIGURATION LED monitors the E1 learning process through its five states. The states are described in Table E-1. The diagram in Figure E-1 explains in more detail the response of the LED to various conditions in which the AUTO CONFIGURATION button is pressed.

STATE1LED OFF

Button pressed,learning mode disabledor inband managment

active

STATE 2LED REDfor 10 sec

STATE 3LED GREENBLINKING

Learning process has failed Learning process

has succeeded

STATE 5LED GREEN

for 10 sec

Button pressed

STATE 4LED REDBLINKINGfor 10 sec

Button pressed

Button pressedand learning enabled

Figure E-1. Monitoring the E1 Learning from the Front Panel

When E1 learning is activated, either from the front panel or from the terminal, FCD-E1L does not allow entering commands from the terminal.

Page 177: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix E E1 Learning

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Controlling E1 Learning from the Front Panel E-3

Table E-1. AUTO CONFIGURATION LED States

State Indicates that…

OFF Learning process has not started yet.

Blinking green Learning is in progress

Permanent green

(for 10 sec)

Learning process has succeeded

Permanent red

(for 10 sec)

You try to activate E1 learning, while learning is disabled or

inband management is active

Blinkng red

(for 10 sec)

Learning has failed

Page 178: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix E E1 Learning Installation and Operation Manual

E-4 Controlling E1 Learning from the Front Panel FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Page 179: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Introduction F-1

Appendix F

IR-ETH Interface Module

F.1 Introduction

IR-ETH is an interface module for RAD devices, used for converting the Ethernet (10BaseT) electrical levels to the host device TTL levels. It also converts the Ethernet protocol to HDLC to enable long-distance transmission and avoid the Ethernet collision limitation.

IR-ETH includes an internal, self-learning Ethernet bridge, which enables a high performance link between two Ethernet segments at a low transmission rate. The low-speed HDLC transmission is sent over the link and then converted back to an Ethernet signal at the remote unit.

IR-ETH has a 10BaseT interface complying with the IEEE 802.3 standard, terminated in an RJ-45 shielded connector, which can operate over UTP and STP media. The Ethernet port with 10BaseT operates in full- or half-duplex modes.

The optional built-in Ethernet Bridge is a high performance remote, self-learning bridge. It is ideal as a LAN extender or segmenter over E1 link applications. The bridge operates as a media access (MAC) layer remote bridge with self-learning capabilities. It learns and automatically recognizes the addresses of the nodes attached to the local LAN (the LAN directly attached to the FCD-E1L interface), and uses this information to filter the LAN traffic. The address information is stored in tables, which can store up to 10,000 addresses. The address information is automatically updated (aging time is 5 minutes, that is, if no frames are received from a node for 5 minutes, the node address is automatically removed from the tables to ensure that only fresh addresses are used).

Therefore, the bridge blocks the packets addressed to local nodes, and forwards through the FCD-E1L link only multicasts, broadcasts, and packets addressed to nodes attached to the remote LAN.

The filtering and forwarding can be performed at a rate of up to 15,000 packets per second (provided the bandwidth selected on the E1 link is sufficient to carry the resulting payload rate). When bridging is not necessary, e.g., for LAN extender applications, the user can disable the bridge. In this case, the FCD-E1L operates as a repeater that transfers transparently all the traffic to the remote end.

The Ethernet channel interface connects to the TDM bus through a bus interface similar to that of the data channel. The throughput available to the external equipment is determined by the data rate configured by the user.

The remote bridge operates at the physical and data link layers of the OSI model, and is therefore completely transparent to higher level protocols, such as TCP/IP,

Page 180: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix F IR-ETH Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

F-2 Technical Specifications FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

DECnet, XNS, ISO, and to operating systems, such as NetWare, VINES, and 3COM+.

Figure F-1 shows a typical application using an Ethernet interface bridge. Each FCD-E1L unit is connected to an Ethernet network via the Ethernet Interface bridge.

FCD-E1LFCD-E1L

E1 Network

Figure F-1. Typical Application of FCD-E1L with IR-ETH Module

F.2 IR-ETH Interface Options

Figure F-2 shows the rear panel of FCD-E1L with the IR-ETH interface options.

: FOR C ONTIN UE D

TYPE AN D RATI NG OF FUSE .F IRE , REP LAC E ONLY W ITH SAM EPR OTEC TION AGAIN ST R ISK OFCAUTION

100-

230 V

AC

0.25

0A T

250V

E1RX

TX

LINK

ERR

IR-ETH

CH1

CH2

Figure F-2. IR-ETH Ethernet Bridge, 10BaseT Rear Panel

To connect the external equipment to the Ethernet interface, use standard Ethernet cables with RJ-45 connector.

F.3 Technical Specifications

General LAN Table 10,000 addresses

Filtering and Forwarding

15,000 pps

Buffer 256 frames

Delay 1 frame

Traffic Handling Remote MAC-layer bridge with self-learning

LAN Standard Conforms to IEEE 802.3/Ethernet

Data Rate 10 Mbps (20 Mbps 10BaseT FDX)

Page 181: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F IR-ETH Interface Module

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Installation and Operation F-3

Connectors 10BaseT (UTP): Shielded RJ-45

WAN Protocol (internal) HDLC

Data Rate According to the FCD-E1L transmission rate

F.4 Installation and Operation

Although the IR-ETH interface board contains an internal DIP switch on board, this switch is not in use because the corresponding functions are software-controlled (see DEF CH 2 command in Appendix D).

IR-ETH does not support auto negotiation. Therefore, the equipment connected to IR-ETH should not be set to auto negotiation mode.

LAN Installation

The Ethernet with UTP (10BaseT) connectors is designated as a Station. For 10BaseT installation, either a straight cable or a cross-cable may be required. Use a cross-cable when connecting to a port that does not implement the crossover function internally. Otherwise, use a straight cable. (Hubs usually do implement the crossover function internally while network interface cards and other devices do not).

Table F-1 lists pinout of the IR-Ethernet RJ-45 connector.

Table F-1. RJ-45 Pinout

Pin Name Function

1 TD (+) Transmit data positive

2 TD (–) Transmit data negative

3 RD (+) Receive data positive

6 RD (–) Receive data negative

LED Indicators

Figure F-2 shows the indicators located on the rear panel of an FCD-E1L unit with the Ethernet bridge option for UTP. Table F-2 lists the IR-ETH LED indicators and describes their functions.

Note

Page 182: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix F IR-ETH Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

F-4 Installation and Operation FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Table F-2. IR-ETH Bridge LED Indicators

LED Name Function Color

LINK

(UTP only)

Lights when the Ethernet interface is connected to an

active LAN (i.e., a LAN with at least one active station)

Green

ERR

(UTP only)

When configured to full-duplex: during regular

operation, lights when a buffer overflow occurs

When configured to half-duplex: lights momentarily

for each collision

Yellow

TX Lights when transmit activity is present on the

Ethernet interface

Yellow

RX Lights when receive activity is present on the Ethernet

interface

Yellow

Page 183: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 IR-ETH/QN Connector G-1

Appendix G

IR-ETH/QN Interface Module

G.1 Introduction

The IR-ETH/QN interface module includes a high-performance self-learning Fast Ethernet bridge, which is connected to the LAN via a single 10BaseT or 100BaseT port, operating in full- or half-duplex and providing simple and cost-effective interconnection between 10/100BaseT LANs via E1 links. The IR-ETH/QN interface module also supports IEEE 802.1/P frames and IEEE 802.1/Q frames, enabling VLAN applications.

The module automatically learns MAC addresses of the LAN to which it is connected. Its LAN table stores up to 512 addresses with 5-minute automatic aging.

Filtering and forwarding is performed at the maximum theoretical rate of 150,000 packets per second (wire speed). The buffer with 0.512 Mbit SRAM can hold 85 frames. The forwarding of the multicast messages from LAN to WAN can be disabled.

Figure G-1 shows a typical application using FCD-E1L with IR-ETH/QN module.

FCD-E1LFCD-E1L

E1 Network

Figure G-1. Typical Application of FCD-E1L with IR-ETH/QN Module

G.2 IR-ETH/QN Connector

Figure G-2 shows the rear panel of FCD-E1L, equipped with IR-ETH/QN module. Table G-1 lists the module's RJ-45 connector pinout.

Page 184: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix G IR-ETH/QN Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

G-2 Technical Specifications FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Table G-1. RJ-45 Connector Pinout

Pin Signal Function

1 RD (+) Receive Data (positive)

2 RD (-) Receive Data (negative)

3 TD (+) Transmit Data (positive)

6 TD (-) Transmit Data (negative)

: FOR C ONTIN UE D

TYPE AN D RATI NG OF FUSE .F IRE , REP LAC E ONLY W ITH SAM EPR OTEC TION AGAIN ST R ISK OFCAUTION

100-

230 V

AC

0.25

0A T

250V

E1ACTLINK

LINK CH1

CH2

100M

IR-ETH/QN

Figure G-2. Rear Panel of FCD-E1L with IR-ETH/QN Module

G.3 Technical Specifications

Bridge LAN Table 512 MAC addresses

Aging 5 minute, automatic

Filtering and Forwarding Rate

150,000 packets per second

Buffer Size 85 frames

Latency from LAN to LAN at 1536 kbps [msec]

64 byte frame 1.06

128 byte frame 1.72

256 byte frame 3.08

512 byte frame 4.62

1024 byte frame 7.32

1280 byte frame 8.69

1518 byte frame 9.92

LAN Standard IEEE 802.3/Ethernet V.2 (relevant parts), IEEE 802.1q (relevant parts), 802.1p, 802.3x

Data Rate • 10BaseT: 10 Mbps

• 100BaseT: 100 Mbps

Line Code • 10BaseT: Manchester

• 100BaseT: MLT3

Page 185: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix G IR-ETH/QN Interface Module

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Installation and Operation G-3

Connector Shielded RJ-45 socket

WAN Protocol HDLC

Data Rate 64 kbps to 1984 kbps in framed mode, in accordance with the FCD-E1L transmission rate, 2048 Mbps in unframed mode

G.4 Installation and Operation

To set the internal switch on the IR-ETH/QN interface board, you have to open the FCD-E1L case.

Accessing the Internal DIP Switch

To open the FCD-E1L case:

1. Disconnect all the cables connected to FCD-E1L.

2. Slide the blue side panel forward to detach it from the case.

3. Unscrew the two screws located on the bottom panel at the rear end of the unit.

4. Separate the two halves of the FCD-E1L case by lifting the top cover at the end of the unit and sliding it forward.

Access to the inside of the equipment is permitted only to the authorized and qualified personnel.

To avoid accidental electric shock, always disconnect the interface cables and the power cord before removing the unit from its casing.

Line voltages are present inside FCD-E1L when it is connected to power and/or to the lines. Moreover, under certain fault conditions, dangerous voltages may appear on the lines connected to the unit.

Any adjustment, maintenance and repair of the opened instrument under voltage should be avoided as much as possible and, when inevitable, should be carried out only by a skilled technician who is aware of the hazard involved. Capacitors inside the unit may still be charged even after the unit has been disconnected from its source of power.

The IR-ETH/QN interface board includes two DIP switches to control its parameters: SW1 and SW3. SW3, designed for control of main IR-ETH/QN parameters, is located on the upper side of the interface board. SW1, which is not designed for frequent use, is located on the reverse side of the board. For example, to disable automatic MDI/MDIX crossover, you have to detach the IR-ETH/QN module from the FCD-E1L back panel to get access to the reverse side.

Figure G-3 shows location of the configuration DIP switches on the module’s board.

Warning

Page 186: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix G IR-ETH/QN Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

G-4 Installation and Operation FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Figure G-3 illustrates default settings of the SW1 and SW3 DIP switches, as detailed in Table G-2 and Table G-3.

SW3 ON

5.6.

4.3.2. AN

FDXBPRMULNC

1. 100

SW1

5.

7.6.

8.

4.3.2. LC1

LC2FLCNC

NCNC

NC

1. MDI ON

Figure G-3. Location of DIP Switches SW1 and SW3

Setting the DIP Switches

Configure the IR-ETH/QN module by setting the DIP switches SW1 and SW3 in accordance with Figure G-3, Table G-2 and Table G-3.

To make the changes effective, you have to power off the FCD-E1L unit and power it on again.

Note

Note

Page 187: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix G IR-ETH/QN Interface Module

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Installation and Operation G-5

Table G-2. DIP SW1 Switch Settings

Section Name Description Possible Settings*

1 MDI Enables or disables automatic

MDI/MDIX crossover

ON – Automatic MDI/MDIX crossover is disabled

OFF – Automatic MDI/MDIX crossover is enabled

2 LC1 – Permanently set at the factory (OFF)

3 LC2 – Permanently set at the factory (ON)

4 FLC Enables or disables flow control ON – Flow control is enabled

OFF – Flow control is disabled

Note: Flow control function is available only if the autonegotiation is enabled (see Table G-3).

5-8 NC – Permanently set at the factory (OFF)

* Factory settings are shown in bold.

Sections 2, 3, 5, 6, 7 and 8 of the SW1 DIP switch are factory-set and must not be moved by the user.

Table G-3. DIP Switch SW3 Settings

Section Name Description Possible Settings*

1 100 Selects the LAN speed ON – LAN speed is set to 10 Mbps

OFF – LAN speed is set to 100 Mbps

2 AN Controls the LAN

autonegotiation

ON – LAN autonegotiation is disabled

OFF – LAN autonegotiation is enabled

3 FDX Selects the LAN mode ON – LAN half duplex mode

OFF – LAN full duplex mode

4 BPR Controls the

backpressure

ON – Backpressure is enabled

OFF – Backpressure is disabled

5 MUL Controls LAN to WAN

multicasting

OFF – Multicast messages from LAN to WAN are blocked

ON – Multicast messages from LAN to WAN are not blocked

6 NC – Permanently set at the factory (ON)

* Factory settings are shown in bold.

• Section 6 of the SW3 DIP switch is factory-set and must not be moved by the user.

• When autonegotiation is enabled, LAN speed and LAN mode are configured automatically (sections 1 and 3 are disabled).

After completing the internal settings, reinstall the top cover.

Note

Notes

Page 188: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix G IR-ETH/QN Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

G-6 Installation and Operation FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

To reinstall the FCD-E1L top cover:

1. Position the lower half of the FCD-E1L case on a flat surface.

2. Return the top cover. Make sure that the front board CONTROL DCE connector and the AUTO CONFIGURATION button fit the front panel opening correctly, and the top cover guides enter the corresponding recesses at the end of the unit.

3. Secure the two screws located at the end of the unit.

4. Fit the inside tabs of the blue side panel into the unit case grooves, and slide the side panel until it snaps into place.

LED Indicators

Table G-4 lists the IR-ETH/QN rear-panel LED indicators and describes their functions.

Table G-4. LED Indicators

LED Name Color Description Location

LINK Green ON – LAN link is ON Connector

ACT Yellow ON or blinking – Data transfer is detected on the

LAN interface

Connector

100M Green ON – LAN is operating at 100 Mbps

OFF – LAN is operating at 10 Mbps

Panel

Connecting the LAN

Due to automatic crossover feature of the IR-ETH/QN interface module, any LAN port can be connected to the FCD-E1L with either straight or cross cable.

Page 189: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Introduction H-1

Appendix H

IR-IP Interface Module

H.1 Introduction

Overview

IR-IP is a high-performance, miniature IP router based on RAD's unique IP router chip, the ChipRouter. IR-IP has a 10BaseT (UTP) interface and complies with IEEE 802.3. The router interface can operate in either half-duplex or full-duplex mode.

IR-IP filters the traffic, in accordance with the IP address of each packet, and forwards through the WAN link only packets with foreign addresses. IP packets received from the link are automatically forwarded to the LAN connected to the local Ethernet interface if the IP net matches.

IR-IP includes hardware filters which handle all filtering operations at wire speed from both LAN-to-WAN and WAN-to-LAN, without dropping a single packet. Filtering and forwarding are performed at the maximum rate of 35,000 and 30,000 frames per second (wire speed), respectively. The buffer can hold 256 frames of maximum size of 1534 bytes and a throughput latency of one frame.

FCD-E1L equipped with IR-IP interface module can be used as a Frame Relay Access Device (FRAD) with an integral IP router. RFC 1490 is supported for a single DLCI on the WAN link. Detection of the DLCI and the maintenance protocol is performed automatically. This allows the IR-IP to be used as the termination unit of IP services over Frame Relay at the customer premises, opposite a Frame Relay switch in the backbone.

Alternatively, Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) can be run on the WAN link with automatic negotiation on power-up, as well as support for PAP and CHAP authentication. With this feature, IR-IP can operate opposite any PPP compliant access server or backbone router.

IR-IP supports HDLC-like framing, which is especially important for broadcast and multicast applications where bandwidth overhead is critical.

IR-IP supports IP multicast at wire speed, making it suitable for any multicast environment including high speed downstream environments, such as satellite and xDSL. Users on the LAN who register with IR-IP for an IP multicast group using the IGMP protocol filter IP multicast packets at wire speed.

Management and advanced configuration are performed via Telnet.

Page 190: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

H-2 Technical Specifications FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Application

Figure H-1 shows a typical application of the FCD-E1L unit equipped with the IR-IP interface module.

FCD-E1Lwith IR-IP

FCD-E1L with V.35 Interface

E1

Router

Figure H-1. Typical Application of the FCD-E1L Unit with IR-IP

H.2 Technical Specifications

Router Local IP Net Capacity Supports up to 256 hosts on the local LAN IP net

Filtering Rate 35,000 packets per second

Forwarding Rate 30,000 packets per second

Buffer 256 frames (maximum size – 1534 bytes)

Delay 1 frame

Configuration Telnet, through the 10BaseT interface

LAN Standard Conforms to IEEE 802.3

Data Rate 10 Mbps (20 Mbps for 10BaseT in full-duplex mode)

Interface Type • 10BaseT for use on UTP and STP media, terminated in RJ-45 shielded eight-pin connector

Operation Mode Full- or half-duplex user-selectable

WAN Protocols • PPP (PAP/CHAP)

• Frame Relay (RFC 1490)

• HDLC-like framing

Page 191: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Physical Description H-3

H.3 Physical Description

Figure H-2 shows the rear panel of FCD-E1L with the IR-IP interface module.

: FOR C ONTIN UE D

TYPE AN D RATI NG OF FUSE .F IRE , REP LAC E ONLY W ITH SAM EPR OTEC TION AGAIN ST R ISK OFCAUTION

100-

230 V

AC

0.25

0A T

250V

E1ACT

LINK

LINK

ERR SETUP

1 2 3 4IR-IP

CH1

CH2

Figure H-2. IR-IP Ethernet Router, Rear Panel

Table H-1 provides the pinout of the 10BaseT RJ-45 connector.

Table H-1. RJ-45 Pinout

Pin Name Function

1 TD (+) Transmit data positive

2 TD (-) Transmit data negative

3 RD (+) Receive data positive

6 RD (-) Receive data negative

IR-IP DIP Switch

IR-IP interface module contains a four-section DIP switch, used to configure the basic operating parameters of the IP router. The switch is located on the FCD-E1L rear panel as shown in Figure H-2. Table H-2 lists the DIP switch functions.

Table H-2. IR-IP DIP Switch Functions

No Function Values*

1 Enables IR-IP to learn its IP ON – IP address learning is enabled

OFF – IP address learning is disabled

Note: For details, see Assigning the Router LAN Interface Address on page H-7.

2 Selects the WAN protocol ON – PPP protocol

OFF – Frame Relay protocol

3 Selects the LAN mode ON – Full-duplex operation

OFF – Half-duplex operation

4 Controls the remote WAN test loopback, which

returns packets received from the WAN back toward

the WAN

ON – The test loopback is activated

OFF – The test loopback is disabled

* Factory settings are shown in bold.

Page 192: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

H-4 Physical Description FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

• The switch can perform additional control functions, which are described below in the Appendix.

IR-IP LEDs

IR-IP contains three LEDs, which indicate the module activity. Table H-3 explains the functions of the IR-IP interface indicators.

Table H-3. IR- IP Interface Indicators

LED Name Function Color

LINK Lights when the Ethernet interface is connected to an active

LAN

Green

ACT

Flashes when transmit and/or receive activity is present on the

Ethernet interface

Yellow

ERR Indicates erroneous events, such as collisions, buffer

overflows, etc. Also provides additional indications, described

below in this section

Red

Normal Indications

The IP router card can start normal service only after it has been configured for operation in the user’s network. To simplify the configuration procedure, when an unconfigured IP router card is powered on, it enters the configuration mode.

Power-Up Indications for Unconfigured IP Router Card

LINK indicator Lights steadily after power up when connected to an active station (10BaseT only).

ERR indicator Lights steadily for 12 to 15 seconds, until the card completes software decompression. After this interval, the ERR indicator starts flashing rapidly (about 3 times per second), to indicate that the card is in the configuration mode. Configuration instructions are described further in the appendix.

Power-Up Indications for Configured IP Router Card

LINK indicator Lights steadily after power up when connected to an active station (10BaseT only).

ERR indicator After software decompression, turns off.

Indications during Normal Service

During normal service, the LINK indicator (10BaseT version) lights steadily, indicating LAN integrity. The ACT indicator flashes in accordance with the Ethernet interface traffic.

Notes

Page 193: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 IR-IP Management Subsystem, General H-5

The ERR indicator is normally off, however it may light momentarily from time to time, to indicate an occasional buffer overflow. If the ERR indicator lights often, the IP router configuration may have to be changed, e.g., it may need more main link bandwidth.

For instructions on displaying and clearing the alarms, refer to Handling Alarms on page 6-4.

H.4 IR-IP Management Subsystem, General

Introduction

The IR-IP interface module management subsystem supports the following functions:

• Preliminary configuration

• Configuration of management access parameters

• Advanced configuration of IR-IP parameters

• Collection and display of statistical performance data

• Maintenance functions, which include:

Software downloading

Resetting of various subsystems

Display of error log

Ping utility, for checking IP connectivity.

The management subsystem of the IR-IP interface module is a separate, independent entity, and therefore it cannot be managed through the FCD-E1L management subsystem.

The communication with the IR-IP management subsystem is made through the local LAN interface connector of the IR-IP module, designated 10BASE-T or 10BASE-2, using the Telnet protocol. Passwords can be used to prevent unauthorized access.

Accessing the IR-IP Management Subsystem

The IR-IP interface module must be configured in accordance with the specific requirements of the user’s application before it can be used in the user’s network. As a result, it is not possible to supply default parameters to enable IR-IP to start service without any preliminary configuration.

Therefore, to enable the user to establish Telnet communication and configure IR-IP, IR-IP is delivered with a factory-default set of parameters. The factory-default parameters are automatically used:

• Before the IP router is configured by the user, e.g., when a new FCD-E1L with IR-IP interface module is put into operation

• After the user’s configuration parameters have been erased.

Page 194: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

H-6 Performing Preliminary Configuration FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

When the factory-default parameters are used, the ERR indicator located on the FCD-E1L rear panel, near the IR-IP Ethernet interface connector flashes rapidly (about three times per second).

The flashing of the ERR indicator also serves as a warning to the user that the IR-IP WAN interface does not send, nor does it receive packets, and therefore IR-IP can be accessed only from the LAN.

After configuring IR-IP, it starts normal operation and routes the traffic in accordance with the user-selected configuration parameters.

To change the parameters of an already-configured IR-IP, establish communication from a Telnet host using the assigned IP address.

Default IP Communication Parameters

The factory-default IP communication parameters of the interface module are:

• The default IP address of the IR-IP Ethernet port is 192.168.205.1, and the default IP subnet mask is 255.255.255.252.

• The port will accept IP communication only from the IP address 192.168.205.2. Therefore, as long as the factory defaults are in effect, you must assign this address to the Telnet host used to configure IR-IP.

Using the IP learning mechanism, as explained below you can change the default parameters.

In the default configuration, the IR-IP WAN interface is disabled. In order to enable the WAN interface, you have to modify the Ethernet port address or the IP subnet mask.

H.5 Performing Preliminary Configuration

General

The software necessary for performing all the management and configuration functions is stored in the IR-IP interface module, and therefore you only need a regular Telnet host to perform all the activities described in this appendix.

A Telnet host is any computer, e.g., an IBM PC or compatible that fulfills the following minimum requirements:

• A standard 10BaseT Ethernet interface

• A TCP/IP protocol stack, and therefore is capable of supporting IP communication through the Ethernet interface

• Telnet client software

• A ping utility.

Note

Note

Page 195: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Performing Preliminary Configuration H-7

Outline of Preliminary Configuration

To perform the preliminary configuration procedure:

1. Connect the Telnet host to the IR-IP interface module.

2. Configure the Telnet host to enable communication with the IR-IP interface module using the default IP parameters.

3. Establish communication with IR-IP and assign the prescribed IP address to its LAN interface.

4. Establish again communication with IR-IP and continue the preliminary configuration in accordance with the Quick Setup Menu section below.

Connecting the Telnet Host

Before starting the management and configuration activities, it is necessary to establish IP communication between your Telnet host and the IR-IP interface module. For this purpose, it is necessary to provide a communication path.

Because of the method used to assign an IP address to IR-IP Ethernet port, it is recommended to connect the Telnet host directly to the IP router 10BASE-T connector. This is made by connecting an Ethernet cross cable between the Ethernet connector of the Telnet host and the IP router connector.

However, you may also connect through a common LAN: in this case, connect your Telnet host and IR-IP to Ethernet hub ports using straight cables.

Preliminary Telnet Host Configuration

You can use the IP learning mechanism to configure the IP communication parameters of the IR-IP LAN interface. In this case, skip to the Assigning the Router LAN Interface Address section below.

If you prefer to use the factory-default parameters to establish IP communication between your Telnet host and IR-IP, configure the Telnet host as follows:

1. Temporarily configure the host IP address as 192.168.205.2.

2. The initial destination IP address to be used by the host is 192.168.205.1.

The first step in the preliminary configuration process is to assign the desired IP address to the LAN interface of the IR-IP interface module. After an IP address is assigned and saved, you must change the destination IP address of the Telnet host to the new address, otherwise it is not possible to continue the configuration process. At the same time, you can also change the temporary IP address assigned to the host (192.168.205.2) back to its permanent address.

Assigning the Router LAN Interface Address

The IP address of the IR-IP LAN interface must be configured as part of the preliminary configuration process. To simplify this process, IR-IP includes a simple and convenient IP address learning mechanism.

Note

Page 196: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

H-8 Performing Preliminary Configuration FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

The IP address can be configured and changed at any time, even after the complete IR-IP configuration process has been performed, because it does not affect other configuration parameters. Moreover, the IP subnet mask is automatically adapted to the new IP address.

IP Learning Mechanism

To simplify the configuration process, IR-IP has a special mechanism for configuring the IP address of its LAN interface. Setting section 1, called IP address learning, of the IR-IP DIP switch (see Table H-2) to ON enables this mechanism.

The IP learning mechanism enables IR-IP to learn its LAN interface IP address by receiving frames sent by a ping utility to the prescribed LAN IP address.

To use the IP learning mechanism, you do not need to know the current address of IR-IP LAN interface, but only the prescribed IP address.

The IP address is actually retrieved from the ARP frames sent during pinging to locate the ping destination, not from the ping frames.

To ensure that the process is correctly performed, it is recommended to check the contents of the ARP table before starting the ping utility, to make sure that it does not contain the address to be assigned to the IP router LAN interface.

To view and edit the ARP table contents:

If the Telnet host you are using runs under Microsoft Inc. Windows™ 95, 98 or NT, use the following procedure to view and edit the ARP table contents:

1. Display the table using the arp -a command.

2. If the table includes the intended IP address, remove it from the table using the arp -d command.

If for some reason the IP learning process does not succeed, before repeating it make sure to remove the IP address from the table.

Assigning a LAN IP Address to a New IR-IP

The following procedure enables you to configure the LAN IP address of a new IR-IP router, i.e., a router using the default parameters (see the Accessing the IR-IP Management Subsystem section above).

If FCD-E1L is already operating, skip Step 2 in the following procedure.

To configure the IP router LAN address:

1. Make sure the preparations described above have been completed, including the configuration of the ping utility.

2. Turn FCD-E1L on and monitor the IP router indicators:

The LINK indicator (10BaseT version) turns on

The ERR indicator lights steadily for approx. 15 seconds, and then starts flashing at a rapid rate (about three times per second).

If the ERR indicator turns off, skip to the What to Do If ... section below.

3. Set section 1 of IR-IP DIP switch to ON.

Note

Page 197: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Performing Preliminary Configuration H-9

The ERR indicator starts flashing faster (approximately four times a second).

4. Send a ping to the new address to be used by IR-IP. A confirmation should be received after the third ping: after the confirmation, the flashing will slow down to approximately twice a second.

If your host does not begin to receive ping replies after three unsuccessful attempts, skip to the What to Do If ... section below.

5. Return section 1 of the IR-IP DIP switch to the OFF position.

The ERR indicator must turn off.

At this stage, the communication with IR-IP router is lost, because its IP address has been changed. Therefore, you must reconfigure the destination IP address of the Telnet host. If you wish, you may also change the temporary IP address assigned to the host (192.168.205.2) back to its permanent address.

Changing the LAN IP Address of a Configured IR-IP

The LAN IP address of an already-configured IR-IP can be changed while it operates. This means it is not necessary to turn FCD-E1L off before starting the configuration procedure. Note however that the IP traffic flow through IR-IP will be disrupted until the other stations in the IP network learn the new address.

To change the LAN IP address of an already-configured IR-IP, use the procedure described above for a new IR-IP with the following differences:

• Configure the destination address of the ping utility to the new LAN interface IP address. It is not necessary to change the Telnet host source address.

• When ready, set section 1 of the IR-IP DIP switch to ON.

The ERR indicator starts flashing faster (approximately four times a second).

• Perform steps 4, 5 of the procedure used for a new IR-IP.

What to Do If ...

The LINK indicator (10BaseT version) does not light immediately after FCD-E1L is turned on

The IR-IP interface module does not receive power from the FCD-E1L power supply. Service is required.

After the power-up process ends, the LINK indicator shows LAN integrity. It may stay turned off without indicating power supply failure.

The ERR indicator does not light immediately after FCD-E1L is turned on

IR-IP is faulty and must be replaced.

After turn-on, the ERR indicator lights for 15 seconds, and then turns off. ACT lights from time to time, but there is no response from IR-IP

One of the following:

• No software loaded into IR-IP. Download software using the procedure described in the New Software Download Menu section below.

Note

Page 198: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

H-10 IR-IP Management Utility FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

• IR-IP has been configured. If you do not know the current IP address of the LAN interface, erase IR-IP router configuration using the procedure given in the Erasing User’s Configuration section below.

No ping replies from IR-IP

If your host does not begin to receive ping replies after three unsuccessful attempts, check the physical connection path between the Telnet host Ethernet interface and the IR-IP 10BASE-T connector.

The IP learning process is not successful

Check that the prescribed IP address does not appear in the ARP table.

H.6 IR-IP Management Utility

General Operating Procedures

The IR-IP interface module is managed via a simple, menu-driven utility that uses a basic terminal user interface. A typical screen is shown in Figure H-3.

As seen in Figure H-3, each screen has a header that identifies the device being configured and its logical name, assigned by the user, followed by the running software revision and date. The bottom line of the screen displays prompts that guide you in the execution of the various activities.

Use the following general procedures to perform the desired activity:

• To change a parameter or to select a menu item, type the corresponding line number.

• For a parameter, which has a discrete set of values, the parameter values are enclosed in brackets [ ]. To select a new value, press the spacebar to scroll among the available values until the desired value is displayed, and then press <Enter> to select the displayed value.

• To enter a value which requires free text entry, type in the desired string and then press <Enter>. Use backspace to erase the current string.

• After all the parameters have been selected, a prompt appears, requesting that you confirm the changes.

For proper display of the screens, you must: • Select a fixed-pitch system font for the display. Use your operating system

documentation to find how to select a proper font. • Configure the Telnet utility to use VT-100 terminal emulation.

Starting a Management Utility

The management utility is started automatically when Telnet communication is established. If password protection is enabled (see the Management Access Menu section below), you will be prompted to enter the Telnet password. The opening screen, which appears after the Telnet session activation, is the IR-IP Main menu (see Figure H-3).

Note

Page 199: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 IR-IP Management Utility H-11

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date) 1. Quick Setup 2. Management Access 3. Advanced Setup 4. Device Control 5. View 6. Diagnostic Tool (PING terminal) Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:

Figure H-3. IR-IP Main Menu

To end the utility, press <Esc> when the Main menu is displayed. This will also end the Telnet session.

Menu Structure of Management Utility

Figure H-4 shows the menu structure of the IR-IP management utility.

Main Menu

1. Quick Setup

1. LAN IP Address2. LAN IP Mask3. WAN IP Address4. WAN IP Mask5. Default Gateway6. DHCP Server IP Address7. Read Protocol From DIP Switches8. Protocol

1.Telenet Password2. Telenet Activity Timeout3. SNMP Access4. SNMP Read Community5. SNMP Write Community6. SNMP Trap Community7. SNMP Management Table

1. Device Identification 1. Device Name 2. Contact Person 3. System Location

1. New Software Download 1. Server IP Address 2. File Name 3. Total Timeout 4. Start Operation

1. Configuration and Connection 2. ARP Tables 3. Multicast Groups Table 4. Statistics

1. Ping IP Address 2. Start Pinging 3. Stop Pinging

2. View Error Log

3. Erase Configuration

4. Resets 1. Reset Device 2. Reset LAN 3. Reset WAN

2. Interface Parameters 1. LAN Status 2. WAN Status 3. WAN Throttle 4. Aging Timeout

3. Protocol Parameters (FR) 1. Self Learn 2. Maintenance Protocol 3. DLCI 4. CIR 5. EIR

3. Protocol Parameters (PPP) 1. Header and Control Field Compression 2. Protocol Field Compression 3. Authentication Protocol 4. Security Host/Guest 5. User Name To Send 6. Password To Send 7. User Name To Accept 8. Password To Accept

4. Multicast 1. Multicast Forwarding 2. Static Groups

2. Management Access 3. Advanced Setup 4. Device Control 5. View 6. Diagnostic Tool

PING Terminal

Figure H-4. Management Utility, Menu Structure

Page 200: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

H-12 Quick Setup Menu FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

H.7 Quick Setup Menu

The Quick Setup menu is used to select the main parameters’ values that must be defined before you start using IR-IP.

Use the Advanced Setup menu (see the Advanced Setup Menu section below) to specify values for other IR-IP configuration parameters not included in this menu.

To access the Quick Setup menu:

• From the Main menu, type 1.

The Quick Setup menu appears (Figure H-5).

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date) Quick Setup ===================================================================== 1. LAN IP Address :192.168.100.001 2. LAN IP Mask :255.255.255.000 3. WAN IP Address (empty for unnumbered) :............... 4. WAN IP Mask (empty for unnumbered) :............... 5. Default Gateway (empty - WAN interface) :............... 6. DHCP Server IP address (empty for relay disabled) :............... 7. Read Protocol From DIP Switches :[ Yes ] 8. Protocol :[ Frame Relay ] Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:

Figure H-5. Quick Setup Menu

LAN IP Address

Used to enter the IP address for the IP router LAN interface. This is the address to which nodes connected to the local LAN send packets addressed to the WAN.

LAN IP Mask

Used to enter the IP subnet mask. The IP router supports a maximum of 254 hosts on the LAN, therefore you must use Class C subnet masks. The basic subnet IP mask for Class C addresses, which supports the maximum possible number of hosts, 254, is 255.255.255.0. To help you understand the selection of IP subnet masks, Figure H-6 provides a configuration example for a LAN with 6 nodes: the IP subnet mask for a 6-node IP network is 255.255.255.248.

FCD-E1L with IR-IP

.6.5.4.3192.168.1.2

LAN IP Address: 192.168.1.2

IP Address.248.248.248.248255.255.255.248

Mask: 255.255.255.248

Mask192.168.1.1192.168.1.1192.168.1.1192.168.1.1192.168.1.1Default Gateway

Page 201: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Quick Setup Menu H-13

Figure H-6. Selecting the IP Subnet Mask

WAN IP Address

Used to enter the IP address for the IR-IP WAN interface, i.e., the IP address to be used by IP hosts on the WAN to reach this IR-IP interface module.

If the WAN IP Address field remain blank, IR-IP operates in the Unnumbered Router Mode.

WAN IP Mask

Used to enter the IP subnet mask for the WAN interface.

Default Gateway

Operation without Default Gateway

The IP interface module is intended to enable the extension of LANs through the FCD-E1L link. Therefore, its default routing operation is different from the default routing operation of standard IP routers:

• IR-IP forwards packets with destinations not located on the local LAN through the WAN interface

• Packets received from the WAN interface and destined to hosts located on the local LAN are forwarded to the LAN; other packets are discarded.

The default operation is used when the Default Gateway field is blank.

Operation with Default Gateway

You can instruct IR-IP to send packets with destinations not located on the local LAN to a specific router, which is called the default gateway. The default gateway must be connected to the local LAN.

To use this option, enter the IP address of another router attached to the local LAN in the Default Gateway field.

It is very important to obtain the correct parameters from the system administrator or ISP. The most common problem when establishing an IP connection is incorrect configuration of IP parameters and default gateway. Do not try to guess these parameters.

DHCP Relay

IR-IP can operate as a DHCP relay for computers on its LAN. In this mode, the user does not need to configure the IP addresses and other related parameters for the PCs on the LAN: they receive the configuration from the DHCP server via the IR-IP module.

Note

Page 202: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

H-14 Quick Setup Menu FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

FCD-E1L with IR-IPLAN IP Address: 192.168.1.2

Mask: 255.255.255.248

DHCP Server

IP Network

Figure H-7. Selecting the IP Subnet Mask

To configure the IR-IP as a DHCP relay:

• Enter the IP address of the DHCP server in this field.

Leaving this field blank disables the DHCP relay operation.

Reading Protocol from DIP Switches

Selecting YES for this parameter forces IR-IP router card to use the WAN protocol selected by section 2 of its DIP switch: PPP or Frame Relay.

If you want to be able to select the WAN protocol by means of the Protocol field (parameter 7) of the Quick Setup menu, select NO.

Protocol

Used to select the WAN protocol to be used by the IP router card: PPP, HDLC or Frame Relay.

This parameter is available only if the Read Protocol from DIP Switches parameter is set to NO.

Page 203: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Management Access Menu H-15

H.8 Management Access Menu

The Management Access menu is used to enable the use of passwords to protect the access to IR-IP management utility, and control the inactivity time-out interval.

When password protection is enabled, a Telnet management session can start only after the correct password is entered.

To access the Management Access menu:

• From the Main menu, type 2.

The Management Access menu appears (Figure H-8).

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date) Quick Setup Management Access ===================================================================== 1. Telnet Password :.......... 2. Telnet Inactivity Timeout (min) :300.. 3. SNMP Access :Disabled 4. SNMP Read Community :public.... 5. SNMP Write Community :public.... 6. SNMP Trap Community :public.... 7. SNMP Management Table :>>> Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:

Figure H-8. Management Access Menu

Since the IP router card does not support SNMP management, the SNMP Read Community, SNMP Write Community, SNMP Trap Community, and SNMP Management Table parameters are not used.

Telnet Password

By default, management access to IR-IP via Telnet is unrestricted. To restrict access, enter a Telnet password by selecting 1 in the Management Access menu. The password can include up to 10 characters, and is case-sensitive. The next time a Telnet session is opened, a password must be entered to enable you to access the IR-IP menus.

At any time, only one Telnet connection to IR-IP is permitted. Any attempt to open an additional connection while the current session is open is rejected.

Telnet Inactivity Timeout

This parameter specifies the time a Telnet session is kept open when there is no keyboard activity. When the specified time-out expires, the Telnet session is closed and another user can access IR-IP.

Note

Page 204: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

H-16 Advanced Setup Menu FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

H.9 Advanced Setup Menu

The Advanced Setup menu is used to select the desired group of IR-IP configuration parameters.

The parameters accessed through Advanced Setup menu supplement the parameters available on the Quick Setup screen, by providing control over all the other IR-IP parameters.

To access the Advanced Setup menu:

• From the Main menu, press 3.

The Advanced Setup menu appears (Figure H-9).

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date) Quick Setup Management Access Advanced Setup ===================================================================== 1. Device identification 2. Interface Parameters 3. Protocol Parameters 4. Multicast IP Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:

Figure H-9. Advanced Setup Menu

Device Identification Menu

The Device Identification menu is used to define and store in the IR-IP logistic information: the logical name of IR-IP, information on the contact person and device location.

To access the Device Identification menu:

• From the Advanced Setup menu, type 1.

The Device Identification menu appears (Figure H-10).

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date) Quick Setup Management Access Advanced Setup ..................................................................... Device identification ===================================================================== 1. Device Name :IR-IP.. 2. Contact Person :Name of contact Person 3. System Location :The location of this device Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:

Figure H-10. Device Identification Menu

Page 205: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Advanced Setup Menu H-17

Device Name

Select this parameter to assign an arbitrary name to IR-IP for identification by the system manager (up to eight characters). The assigned name is displayed in the screen header.

Contact Person

Select this parameter to enter the name of the person to be contacted with matters pertaining to this equipment unit.

System Location

Select this parameter to enter the physical location of the device.

Interface Parameters Menu

The Interface Parameters menu is used to control the operation of IR-IP interfaces.

To access the Interface Parameters menu:

• From the Advanced Setup menu, type 2.

The Interface Parameters menu appears (Figure H-11).

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date) Quick Setup Management Access Advanced Setup ................................................................. Device identification Interface Parameters ================================================================= 1. LAN Status :[ Open ] 2. WAN Status :[ Open ] 3. WAN Throttle :[ Full ] 4. Aging Timeout (min) :5. Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:

Figure H-11. Interface Parameters Menu

LAN Status

Used to enable/disable the flow of packets through LAN interface:

• Open – the flow of packets is enabled.

• Closed – the flow of packets is disabled. As a result, IR-IP does not accept, nor sends packets to the LAN, but its WAN interface may still be active, and can interact with other IP hosts on the WAN.

WAN Status

Used to enable/disable the flow of packets through the WAN interface:

• Open – the flow of packets is enabled.

Page 206: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

H-18 Advanced Setup Menu FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

• Closed – the flow of packets through the WAN interface is disabled. As a result, IR-IP does not accept from, nor sends packets to the WAN. However, the LAN interface of the IP router is still active.

WAN Throttle

This parameter specifies the maximum data rate at which frames are sent to the WAN (i.e., to the HDSL link).

The available selections are:

• 64 kbps

• 128 kbps

• 256 kbps

• 512 kbps

• 1024 kbps

• Full (no restriction on the rate).

Since the IP router buffers have a limited capacity (256 frames), it is recommended to select the WAN Throttle parameter in accordance with the line rate.

Aging Timeout

Used to specify the time after which inactive LAN stations are removed from the IR-IP ARP table.

A station is defined as inactive when no IP traffic is received from it by the IR-IP LAN interface.

WAN Protocol Parameters – Frame Relay Protocol Menu

The Frame Relay Protocol Parameters menu is used to configure the parameters Frame Relay WAN for protocol (the WAN protocol is selected by means of the Quick Setup Menu) in Figure H-5.

To access the Protocol Parameters menu:

• From the Advanced Setup menu, type 3.

Self Learn

Used to specify whether the Frame Relay DLCI and maintenance protocol is learned automatically (ENABLED), or is manually entered (DISABLED).

Maintenance Protocol

When the Self Learn parameter is DISABLED, use this parameter to specify the desired maintenance protocol.

DLCI

When the Self Learn parameter is DISABLED, use this parameter to specify the DLCI used for exchanging maintenance protocol messages.

Page 207: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Advanced Setup Menu H-19

CIR

Used to specify the maximum amount of data, in bits, which the Frame Relay network guarantees to transfer during the measurement interval (the measurement interval is usually one second).

The value of this parameter is obtained from your Frame Relay service provider.

EIR

Used to specify the maximum amount of data, in bits, that the Frame Relay network will attempt to deliver during the measurement interval. The value of this parameter is obtained from the Frame Relay service provider.

A typical Frame Relay Protocol Parameters menu is shown in Figure H-12.

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date) Quick Setup Management Access Advanced Setup ..................................................................... Device identification Interface Parameters Protocol Parameters ===================================================================== 1. Self Learn :[ Enabled ] 2. Maintenance Protocol :[ ANSI T1.617 ANNEX D ] 3. DLCI (0-None) :0.. 4. CIR :0....... 5. EIR :64000... Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:

Figure H-12. Frame Relay Protocol Parameters Menu

WAN Protocol Parameters – PPP Protocol Menu

The PPP Protocol Parameters menu is used to configure the parameters PPP WAN for protocol (the WAN protocol is selected by means of the (the WAN protocol is selected by means of the Quick Setup Menu) in Figure H-5.

To access the Protocol Parameters menu:

• From the Advanced Setup menu, type 3.

Header and Control Field Compression

Used to control the use of header and control field compression type according to RFC 1661. It is strongly recommended that this compression be used for troubleshooting only.

Protocol Field Compression

Used to control the use of protocol field compression type according to RFC 1661. It is strongly recommended that this compression be used for troubleshooting only.

Page 208: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

H-20 Advanced Setup Menu FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Authentication Protocol

Used to select the authentication protocol used by an IP router configured as host to validate incoming connections.

Security Host/Guest

This option can be used to configure the IP router either as a guest unit, to be authenticated by another router, or as a host unit, that authenticates other routers.

User Name To Send

The name by which an IP router card configured as guest identifies itself.

Password To Send

The password by which an IP router card configured as guest identifies itself.

User Name To Accept

The user name to be accepted by an IP router configured as host, when an incoming connection request is received.

Password To Accept

The user password to be accepted by an IP router configured as host, when an incoming connection request is received.

A typical PPP Protocol Parameters menu is shown in Figure H-13.

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date) Quick Setup Management Access Advanced Setup ..................................................................... Device identification Interface Parameters Protocol Parameters ===================================================================== 1. Header and Control Field Compression :[ No ] 2. Protocol Field Compression: :[ No ] 3. Authentication Protocol :[ NONE/NONE ] 4. Security Host / Guest :[ Guest ] 5. User Name To Send :................. 6. Password To Send :................. 7. User Name To Accept :................. 8. Password To Accept :................. Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:

Figure H-13. PPP Protocol Parameters Menu

Multicast IP Menu

The Multicast IP menu is used to specify the IP multicast frame forwarding parameters, and to access the static multicast groups’ table.

Page 209: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Advanced Setup Menu H-21

To access the Multicast IP menu:

• From the Advanced Setup menu, press 4.

The Multicast IP menu appears (Figure H-14).

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date) Quick Setup Management Access Advanced Setup ..................................................................... Device identification Interface Parameters Protocol Parameters Multicast IP ===================================================================== 1. Multicast forwarding :[ Disable ] 2. Static groups :>>> Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:

Figure H-14. Multicast IP Menu

Multicast Forwarding

Used to control the forwarding of IP multicast frames. The following selections are available:

• DISABLED – Disables multicast forwarding in both directions.

• LAN to WAN – Enables forwarding of IP multicast frames addressed to groups appearing in the Static Multicast Groups table, from the LAN to the WAN.

• WAN to LAN – Enables forwarding of IP multicast frames addressed to groups appearing in the Static Multicast Groups table, from the WAN to the LAN.

• BIDIRECTIONAL – Enables forwarding of IP multicast frames addressed to groups appearing in the Static Multicast Groups table, in both directions.

• WAN to LAN + IGMP – Enables forwarding of IP multicast frames addressed to groups appearing in the Static Multicast Groups table, from the WAN to the LAN. In addition, more groups can be added dynamically (the additional can be viewed using the View menu – Figure H-19).

• TRANSPARENT – All the IP multicast frames are forwarded, irrespective of the Static Multicast Groups table.

Static Groups

Select this parameter to access the static multicast groups table. The table is used to specify the IP addresses for up to 10 IP multicast groups. You can add, change, or delete each entry in the table (see the prompt line).

To access the Static Groups menu:

• From the Multicast IP menu, type 2.

The following screen appears:

Page 210: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

H-22 Device Control Menu FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date)

Static Multicast Groups Table -----------------------------

Group IP Address 1. ................ 2. ................ 3. ................ 4. ................ 5. ................ 6. ................ 7. ................ 8. ................ 9. ................ 10. ............... Press 'A'-add, 'E'-edit, 'D'-delete, 'C'-clear all, 'ESC'-exit:

Figure H-15. Static Multicast Groups Table

H.10 Device Control Menu The Device Control menu is used to download software from TFTP servers and perform interface and device resets.

To access the Device Control menu:

• From the Main menu, type 4.

The Device Control menu appears (Figure H-16).

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date)

Quick Setup Management Access Advanced Setup Device Control ---------------------------------------------------------- 1. New Software Download 2. View error LOG 3. Erase configuration 4. Resets

Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:

Figure H-16. Device Control Menu

New Software Download Menu

IR-IP operates as a TFTP client, and therefore it is possible to update its software by downloading new software from another computer that operates as a TFTP server.

The New Software Download menu is used to specify the software downloading parameters.

Page 211: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Device Control Menu H-23

To access the New Software Download menu:

• From the Device Control submenu, type 1.

New Software Download menu appears (Figure H-17).

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date) Quick Setup Management Access Advanced Setup Device Control ..................................................................... New Software Download ===================================================================== 1. Server IP Address :............... 2. File Name :................... 3. Total Timeout (sec) :.. 4. Start operation :>>> Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:

Figure H-17. New Software Download Menu

Server IP Address

Used to enter the IP address of the TFTP server.

File Name

Used to enter the name and path of the file to be transferred from the TFTP server.

Total Timeout

Used to enter the time IP router should wait for an acknowledgment from the TFTP server, for example 60 seconds.

Start Operation

After selecting all the necessary parameters, type 4 on the New Software Download screen and then press <Enter> to start the downloading.

You can follow the progress of the downloading process (indicated by arrows).

Upon completion of the download process, the unit performs a reset. The Telnet connection is lost and must be restarted if required.

View Error Log Screen

This item of the Device Control submenu is used to view the error log file. This file logs errors detected in IR-IP for debug and technical support purposes.

Erase Configuration

Selecting this item allows you to reset all the configuration parameters to their default values.

Page 212: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

H-24 Device Control Menu FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

• Do this only if you need to reconfigure the module anew (all the parameters).

• After erase confirmation all connections with the IR-IP module will be lost. For instructions on further configuration, refer to Performing Preliminary Configuration on page H-6.

Resets Menu

The Resets menu allows you to perform reset of IR-IP, or its interfaces. This operation can be used to restore normal operation after service is disrupted by an abnormal condition. Any data stored in the IR-IP buffers is discarded, and the flow of traffic is temporarily interrupted.

To access the Resets menu:

• From the Device Control menu, type 3.

The following screen appears:

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date) Quick Setup Management Access Advanced Setup Device Control ..................................................................... New Software Download View error LOG Resets ===================================================================== 1. Reset Device 2. Reset LAN 3. Reset WAN Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:

Figure H-18. Resets Menu

Reset Device

To restart IR-IP:

• From the Resets menu, type 1.

You will be prompted to confirm the reset operation.

Resetting the device will restart the IR-IP interface module, and therefore traffic flow is temporarily interrupted, and the Telnet connection is lost.

Reset LAN

To reset the LAN interface:

• From the Resets menu, type 2.

You will be prompted to confirm the reset operation.

Note

Note

Page 213: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 View Menu H-25

This operation restarts the IR-IP LAN controller.

To continue your Telnet session, press any key within 15 seconds following the confirmation of the reset operation.

Reset WAN

To reset the WAN interface:

• From the Resets menu, type 3.

You will be prompted to confirm the reset operation.

Resetting the WAN interface causes the WAN controller to be restarted. This results in renegotiation of the WAN protocol parameters.

To continue your Telnet session, press any key within 15 seconds following the confirmation of the reset operation.

H.11 View Menu

The View menu is used to view the IR-IP configuration data, and display information on its ARP tables, multicast Groups tables and statistics.

To access the View menu:

• From the Main menu, type 5.

The View menu appears (Figure H-19).

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date) Quick Setup Management Access Advanced Setup Device Control View ---------------------------------------------------------- 1. Configuration and Connection 2. ARP Tables 3. Multicast Groups Table 4. Statistics Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:

Figure H-19. View Menu

Note

Note

Page 214: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

H-26 View Menu FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Configuration and Connection

This screen is used to view the configuration parameters of IR-IP. In addition, you can also view the current status of the LAN and WAN interface.

To access the Configuration and Connection screen:

• From the View menu, type 1.

The View Configuration screen appears (Figure H-20).

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date)

VIEW CONFIGURATION ------------------ BOOT Version :1.06 18.03.1999 Device Name :IP router card System Location :The location of this device Contact Person :Name of contact Person

MAC Address : 00-20-D2-16-3F-9B Default Gateway : WAN

Intrf Type Baud(Kbps) Prot IP Address IP Mask Status ..................................................................... LAN UTP ------- Ethr 192.168.205.005 255.255.255.000 Connected WAN V.110 FR Not Conn.

Press any key to continue:

Figure H-20. View Configuration Screen

ARP Tables

This screen is used to display the IR-IP ARP table. This table shows the IP address assigned to each station on the LAN (the stations are identified by their MAC addresses).

To access the ARP Tables screen:

• From the View menu, type 2.

The ARP Tables screen appears (Figure H-21).

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date)

ARP Table ---------

IP Address MAC Address IP Address MAC Address 192.168.205.003 00-40-33-20-C8-3C

Press any key for exit

Figure H-21. ARP Tables Screen

Page 215: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 View Menu H-27

Multicast Groups Table Screen

This screen is used to display information about the multicast group IP addresses and their status.

To access the Multicast Groups Table screen:

• In the View menu, type 3.

The Multicast Groups Table screen appears (Figure H-22).

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date) Multicast Groups Table ---------------------- Group IP Address Status Group IP Address Status Press any key for exit

Figure H-22. Multicast Groups Table Screen

Statistics Screen

The Statistics screen is used to display statistical information on the traffic between the networks connected by IR-IP. The data displayed on this screen enables you to evaluate the IR-IP performance. Two different Statistics screens are used, one for the LAN side and the other for the WAN side.

To access the Statistics menu:

• In the View menu, type 4.

The LAN and WAN Statistics screens appear (Figure H-23 and Figure H-24).

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date)

SYSTEM STATISTICS -----------------

Counter Name Val Counter Name Val LAN in Octets 83504 LAN IP Header Errors 0 LAN Unicast Frames In 1 LAN IP Address Errors 0 LAN Non-Unicast Frames In 9 LAN Alignment Errors 0 LAN Out Octets 83504 LAN CRC Errors 0 LAN Unicast Frames Out 3560 LAN Single Collisions 0 LAN Non-Unicast Frames Out 0 LAN Multiple Collisions 0 LAN to WAN Frames Passed 1698 LAN Late Collisions 0 LAN IP Datagram Received 2638 LAN Excessive Collisions 0 LAN to CPU Frames Discarded 0 LAN Frames Too Long Errors 0 LAN to WAN Frames Discarded 0 LAN RX FIFO Overrun Error 0 LAN Out Errors 0 LAN SQE Transmitted 0 LAN RX Frames Errors 0 LAN Deferred Frames 1 LAN MAC Receive Errors 0 LAN Carrier Sense Lost 0 LAN MAC TX Errors 0 LAN FIFO Underrun 0 N - Next Screen. ESC - Back To Previous Menu. R - Refresh Page. C - Clear The Counters Of This Page.

Figure H-23. LAN Statistics Screen

Page 216: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

H-28 Diagnostic Tool (Ping Terminal) Menu FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date)

SYSTEM STATISTICS -----------------

Counter Name Val Counter Name Val WAN in Octets 83504 WAN Alignment Errors 0 WAN Out Octets 1950 WAN Aborted Frames 0 WAN Out Frames 1723 WAN Short Frames 0 WAN to LAN Frames Transfer 1698 WAN RX FIFO Overrun Error 0 WAN IP Datagram Received 1723 WAN to CPU Frames Errors 0 WAN to CPU Discarded 0 WAN Frame Too Long Errors 0 WAN to LAN Discarded 0 WAN IP Header Errors 0 WAN Out Errors 0 WAN IP Addres Errors 0 WAN CRC Errors 0 PPP Address Error 0 PPP Control Error 0 DLCI Unrecognized Error 0 Frame Relay Forward Conge 0 Frame Relay Backward Conge 0 P - Previous Screen. ESC - Back To Previous Menu. R - Refresh Page. C - Clear The Counters Of This Page.

Figure H-24. WAN Statistics Screen

H.12 Diagnostic Tool (Ping Terminal) Menu

This section provides information on the diagnostic tool provided with IR-IP (the ping utility).

To access the Diagnostic Tools menu:

• In the Main menu, type 6.

The Diagnostic Tools menu appears (Figure H-25).

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date) Quick Setup Management Access Advanced Setup Device Control View Diagnostic Tools (PING terminal) ===================================================================== 1. Ping IP Address :192.168.100.011 2. Start Pinging :>>> 3. Stop Pinging :>>> Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:

Figure H-25. Diagnostic Tools Menu

Page 217: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Diagnostic Tool (Ping Terminal) Menu H-29

Using the Ping Function

The Ping option is used to confirm IP connectivity by pinging other IP hosts. Connectivity is confirmed by receiving a reply from the remote (pinged) IP host.

To ping a host:

1. From the Diagnostic Tools menu, type 1 and enter the desired host IP address.

2. Press <Enter> to confirm the destination IP address.

3. To start pinging, type 2 on the Diagnostic Tools screen.

After pinging starts, you can monitor the ping status. A typical screen is shown in Figure H-26.

After pinging is started, it continues in the background even if you exit the Diagnostics Tools screen. In this case, a Ping Running message appears in the top upper left-hand corner of the screen.

4. To stop pinging, type 3 from the Diagnostic Tools menu.

A Ping Stopped message is displayed. To clear the message and return to the Diagnostic Tools screen, press any key.

IR_IP <IR-IP> S/W Ver. 1.21 (date) Quick Setup Management Access Advanced Setup Device Control View Diagnostic Tools (PING terminal) ===================================================================== 1. Ping IP Address :192.168.100.011 2. Start Pinging :>>> 3. Stop Pinging :>>> Pinging 192.168.212.001 Sent 27 Recvd 25 Lost 2 Resp.Time 60 ms Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:

Figure H-26. Diagnostic Tools Menu after Receiving Pinging Response

Note

Page 218: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

H-30 Erasing IR-IP Software FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

H.13 Erasing User’s Configuration

The user-defined configuration parameters are stored in the IP router card flash memory. After the user-defined configuration parameters are erased, the IP router card automatically loads the default parameters.

You may want to erase the current configuration parameters:

• Before IR-IP is prepared for operation in a new application.

• When you cannot configure IR-IP because its current LAN-interface IP address and/or the Telnet password, are not known.

To erase the user’s configuration:

1. Turn FCD-E1L off.

2. Set all the four sections of the IR-IP DIP switch (see Table H-2) to ON.

3. Turn FCD-E1L on and monitor the ERR and LINK indicators: they must blink alternately.

4. While ERR and LINK are blinking (within 15 seconds), set sections 1 and 2 of the DIP switch to OFF.

The IP router configuration is erased. During the process of erasing, the ERR indicator turns on and lights steadily.

If you do not set sections 1 and 2 to OFF within 15 seconds of power-up, the IP router card ignores the setting of all the four sections to ON and starts normal operation. In this case, it is recommended to turn the FCD-E1L off and then back on.

To abort the whole operation, turn FCD-E1L off, return all the four-switch section to the desired positions, and then turn FCD-E1L on again.

5. Turn FCD-E1L off, and then return all the four sections of the DIP switch to the desired positions.

H.14 Erasing IR-IP Software

You may erase the IR-IP application software, without erasing the user-defined parameters.

After the application software is erased, IR-IP starts its TFTP server application, and waits for the downloading of software by a TFTP client connected to its LAN interface. The procedure to be used to download the application software in this case is also described below.

You may want to erase the application software if the downloading of new software using the Device Control menu (see Figure H-16) fails, and the IP router card does not function properly.

Note

Page 219: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module

FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0 Erasing IR-IP Software H-31

Erasing Application Software

To erase the application software:

1. Turn FCD-E1L off.

2. Set all the four sections of IR-IP DIP switch to ON.

3. Turn FCD-E1L on and monitor the ERR and LINK indicators: they must blink alternately.

4. While ERR and LINK are blinking (within 15 seconds), set sections 3 and 4 of the DIP switch to OFF.

The IP router application software is erased. During the process of erasing, the ERR indicator turns on and lights steadily.

If you do not set sections 3 and 4 to OFF within 15 seconds of power-up, IR-IP ignores the setting of all the four sections to ON and starts normal operation. In this case, it is recommended to turn FCD-E1L off and then back on.

Alternately, to abort the whole operation, turn FCD-E1L off, return all the four switches to the desired positions, and then turn FCD-E1L on again.

5. Turn FCD-E1L off, and then return all the four sections of the DIP switch to the desired positions.

Downloading New Software

After erasing the application software, you can download new software from any computer that can serve as a TFTP client.

To enable the downloading, IR-IP automatically activates its TFTP server application with the following factory-default IP parameters:

• IP address: 192.168.205.1

• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.252.

Connect the computer serving as a TFTP client to the IR-IP 10BASE-T connector in the way as a Telnet host used for preliminary configuration (see the Performing Preliminary Configuration section). The computer IP parameters must be configured as follows:

• IP address 192.168.205.2

• Subnet mask 255.255.255.252

• Default gateway 192.168.205.1

To download new software:

1. If necessary, turn FCD-E1L off.

2. Set all the four sections of the IR-IP DIP switch to OFF.

3. Turn FCD-E1L on.

4. Connect the computer to the IP router LAN interface (for the 10BaseT version, verify that the LINK indicator lights steadily) and configure its IP parameters as explained above.

Note

Page 220: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Appendix H IR-IP Interface Module Installation and Operation Manual

H-32 Erasing IR-IP Software FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

5. Run a standard TFTP client application on the Telnet host, and download the appropriate software file.

If the download is successful, IR-IP starts using the new software.

If the downloading fails, repeat the download process.

Page 221: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

24 Raoul Wallenberg Street, Tel Aviv 69719, Israel

Tel: +972-3-6458181, Fax +972-3-6483331, +972-3-6498250

E-mail: [email protected], Web site: http://www.rad.com

Customer Response Form

RAD Data Communications would like your help in improving its product documentation. Please complete and return this form by mail or by fax or send us an e-mail with your comments.

Thank you for your assistance!

Manual Name: FCD-E1L Ver. 2.0

Publication Number: 165-200-11/07

Please grade the manual according to the following factors:

Excellent Good Fair Poor Very Poor

Installation instructions

Operating instructions

Manual organization

Illustrations

The manual as a whole

What did you like about the manual?

Page 222: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf
Page 223: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Error Report

Incompatibility with product

Difficulty in understanding text

Regulatory information (Safety, Compliance, Warnings, etc.)

Difficulty in finding needed information

Missing information

Illogical flow of information

Style (spelling, grammar, references, etc.)

Appearance

Type of error(s) or problem(s):

Other

Please list the exact page numbers with the error(s), detail the errors you found (information missing, unclear or inadequately explained, etc.) and attach the page to your fax, if necessary.

Please add any comments or suggestions you may have.

Distributor

End user

VAR

You are:

Other

Who is your distributor?

Your name and company:

Job title:

Address:

Direct telephone number and extension:

Fax number:

E-mail:

Page 224: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf
Page 225: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf
Page 226: Manual de instalación y configuración FCD-E1L.pdf

Publication No. 165-200-11/07

International Headquarters 24 Raoul Wallenberg Street

Tel Aviv 69719, Israel

Tel. 972-3-6458181

Fax 972-3-6498250, 6474436

E-mail [email protected]

North America Headquarters 900 Corporate Drive

Mahwah, NJ 07430, USA

Tel. 201-5291100 Toll free 1-800-4447234

Fax 201-5295777

E-mail [email protected]

www.rad.com The Access Company